Você está na página 1de 236

User’s Manual

LG Programmable Logic Controller

Redundancy System
GLOFA-GM GMR-CPUA
GMR-CPUB

LG Industrial Systems
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
► Read this manual thoroughly before using LGIS equipment. Also, pay
careful attention to safety and handle the module properly.
► Safety precautions are for using the product safely and correctly in order to
prevent the accidents and danger, so make sure to follow all directions in
safety precautions.
► The precautions are divided into 2 sections, ‘Warning’ and ‘Caution’. Each
of the meaning is represented as follows

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous


Warning conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous


Caution conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury
or physical damage.

► The symbols which are indicated in the PLC and User’s Manual mean as
follows;

This symbol means paying attention because of danger in specific


situations.

This symbol means paying attention because of danger of electrical


shock.

► Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it
whenever necessary. Always forward it to the end user.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Design Precautions
Warning
 Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system
safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or
the PLC module. Otherwise, serious trouble could result from
erroneous output or erroneous operation.
- Outside the PLC, construct mechanical damage preventing interlock
circuits such as emergency stop, protective circuits, positioning upper
and lower limits switches and interlocking forward/reverse operation.
When the PLC detects the following problems, it will stop calculation and
turn off all output in the case of watchdog timer error, module interface
error, or other hardware errors.
However, one or more outputs could be turned on when there are
problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect, such as malfunction of output
device (relay, transistor, etc.) itself or I/O controller. Build a fail safe
circuit exterior to the PLC that will make sure the equipment operates
safely at such times. Also, build an external monitoring circuit that will
monitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble.

 Make sure all external load connected to output does NOT exceed the
rating of output module.
Overcurrent exceeding the rating of output module could cause fire, damage
or erroneous operation.

 Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the PLC
main module power is turned on.
If the external power supply is turned on first, it could result in erroneous
output or erroneous operation.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Design Precautions
Caution
 Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main
circuit or power wires, or install them close to each other. They should
be installed 100mm (3.94inch) or more from each other.
Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation.

Installation Precautions
Caution
 Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specification
contained in this manual or datasheet.
Using the PLC in an environment outside the range of the general
specifications could result in electric shock, fire, erroneous operation, and
damage to or deterioration of the product.

 Completely turn off the power supply before loading or unloading the
module.
Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product.

 Make sure all modules are loaded correctly and securely.


Not doing so could cause a malfunction, failure or drop.

 Make sure I/O and extension connector are installed correctly.


Poor connection could cause an input or output failure.

 When install the PLC in environment of much vibration, be sure to


insulate the PLC from direct vibration.
Not doing so could cause electric shock, fire, and erroneous operation.

 Be sure to there are no foreign substances such as conductive debris


inside the module.
Conductive debris could cause fires, damage, or erroneous operation.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Wiring Precautions

Warning
 Completely turn off the external power supply when installing or
placing wiring.
Not doing so could cause electric shock or damage to the product.

 Make sure that all terminal covers are correctly attached.


Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock.

Caution
 Be sure that wiring is done correctly be checking the product’s rated
voltage and the terminal layout.
Incorrect wiring could result in fire, damage, or erroneous operation.

 Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque.


If the terminal screws are loose, it could result in short circuits, fire, or
erroneous operation.

 Be sure to ground the FG or LG terminal to the protective ground


conductor.
Not doing so could result in erroneous operation.

 Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring


debris inside the module.
Such debris could cause fire, damage, or erroneous operation.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Startup and Maintenance Precautions
Warning
 Do not touch the terminals while power is on.
Doing so could cause electric shock or erroneous operation.

 Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning the
module or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws.
Not doing so could result in electric shock or erroneous operation.

 Do not charge, disassemble, heat, place in fire, short circuit, or solder


the battery.
Mishandling of battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in
injury and fires.

Caution
 Do not disassemble or modify the modules.
Doing so could cause trouble, erroneous operation, injury, or fire.

 Switch all phases of the external power supply off before mounting or
removing the module.
Not doing so could cause failure or malfunction of the module.

 Use a cellular phone or walky-talky more than 30cm (11.81 inch) away
from the PLC
Not doing so can cause a malfunction.

Disposal Precaution

Caution
 When disposing of this product, treat it as industrial waste.
Not doing so could cause poisonous pollution or explosion.
Revision History

Issue date Manual No. Revised Contents


- FRIA/B is revised to FRIC
2004.5.4 - - The specification and output of G3Q-TR8A in chapter 5 is
revised (TR->FET)

• User’s Manual No. is inscribed on the right bottom side of the back cover.
INDEX

Chapter 1. Introduction xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1-1~1-


4

1.1 How to Use This Manual xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1-1


1.2 Precautions xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1-2
1.3 Definition of Terms xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 1-3

Chapter 2. System Characteristics xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 2-1~2-2

2.1 Characteristics of Redundant Structure xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 2-1


2.2 Characteristics of CPU Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 2-2

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3-1~3-7

3.1 Redundant CPU System xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3-1


3.2 Redundant Input/Output System xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3-2
3.2.1 Switched Input/Output xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3-2
3.2.2 Redundant Input/Output(I/O Redundant)xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3-3
3.2.3 One-sided Input/Output xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3-4
3.3 Basic I/O System xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3-5
3.3.1 Program I/O Address Designation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3-6
3.3.2 Using Special Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3-7
3.3.3 Using Communication Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 3-7

Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 4-1~4-5

4.1 Configuration xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 4-1


4.2 Configuration Equipment xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 4-2
Chapter 5. Product Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-1~5-39

5.1 General Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-1


5.2 Redundant Module Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-2
5.2.1 CPU Module Specifications (GMR-CPUA/GMR-CPUB) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-2
5.2.2 Each Part Name of CPU Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-4
5.2.3 Battery Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-6
5.2.4 Redundant Interface Module Specifications(GMR-DIFA) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-7
5.2.5 CPU Redundant Base Specifications (GMR-B02M, GMR-B04M) xxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-8
5.2.6 Extended Base Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-9
5.2.7 Power Redundant Module Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-10
5.3 Power Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-11
5.3.1 Performance Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-11
5.3.2 Power Module Selection xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-12
5.3.3 Each Part Name xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-13
5.4 I/O Module Operation Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-14
5.4.1 Operation Specifications of basic system xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-14
5.5 I/O Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-
1 5
5.5.1 Precautions when selecting I/O Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-15
5.6 I/O Module Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-16
5.6.1 I/O Module Performance Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-16
5.6.2 Output Module Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-24
5.6.3 Interrupt Input Module Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-33
5.7 Interface Module Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-34
5.7.1 Remote Interface Module Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-34
5.7.2 Remote Interface Module Configuration xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-34
5.7.3 Termination Resistance xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-37
5.7.4 Cable Specifications xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-37
5.7.5 How to install Remoter Interface Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 5-38

Chapter 6. Operation Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-1~6-5

6.1 Types of Operation Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-1


6.2 Program Run Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-1
6.2.1 RUN Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-1
6.2.2 STOP Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-2
6.2.3 DEBUG Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-2
6.2.4 How to Change Program Operation Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-3
6.3 Redundant System Operation Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-4
6.3.1 Redundant Operation Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-4
6.3.2 Redundant Operation Mode Change xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-4
6.3.3 Master Changeover during Redundant Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 6-5

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-1~7-18

7.1 Program Running Structure xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-1


7.2 Program Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-2
7.2.1 Program Types xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-2
7.2.2 How to Run Program xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-2
7.2.3 Program Flow Chart xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-3
7.2.4 Synchronization method during redundant operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-4
7.3 Restart Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-6
7.3.1 Cold restart xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-6
7.3.2 Warm restart xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-6
7.3.3 Hot restart xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx x 7-6
7.3.4 Data Initialization according to Restart Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-7
7.3.5 Restart Mode Application according to Operation Purpose xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-8
7.3.6 Operation Type in each Restart Mode xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx7-8
7.4 Task Program xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-10
7.4.1 Kind of Task xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-10
7.4.2 Processing of Task Program xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-10
7.4.3 Processing of Positive period Task Program xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-11
7.4.4 Processing of Outside Contact Task Program xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-12
7.4.5 Processing of Inside Contact Task Program xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-13
7.4.6 Verification of Task Program xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-13
7.4.7 Example of Program Configuration and Processing xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-15
7.5 Timer/Counter xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-15
7.5.1 Timer xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-15
7.5.2 Counter xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 7-17

Chapter 8. Program Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-1~8-19

8.1 System Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-1


8.1.1 Program Preparation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-1
8.1.2 Operation Method xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-1
8.1.3 Initial Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-1
8.1.4 Operation Participation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-2
8.1.5 Operation Condition xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-3
8.2 I/O Forced ON/OFF xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-3
8.2.1 Forced ON/OFF Setting xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-3
8.2.2 Forced ON/OFF Processing Time and Method xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-4
8.3 Immediate I/O xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-5
8.3.1 Immediate Input xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-5
8.3.2 Immediate Output xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-5
8.3.3 Forced ON/OFF xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-5
8.4 Memory Structure xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-5
8.4.1 Program Memory Structure xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-5
8.4.2 Data Memory Structure xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-6
8.4.3 Resource Global Variable Processing xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-7
8.5 Scan Time xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-
8
8.5.1 Scan Time Calculation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-8
8.5.2 Scan Watchdog Timer xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-9
8.5.3 Delay Time in Redundant Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-10
8.6 RTC : Real Time Clock xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-10
8.6.1 RTC Internal Data xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-10
8.6.2 RTC Time Error xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-11
8.7 Precautions when using special module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-
1 1
8.7.1 Special Module Programming xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-11
8.7.2 Special Module Initialization xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-12
8.7.3 Special Module Control xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-12
8.7.4 Module Replacement During Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-12
8.8 How to Use Memory Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-
1 3
8.8.1 How to Write User’s Program in Memory Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-13
8.8.2 How to operate using Memory Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-14
8.9 Flag For displaying outside fault xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-
1 5
8.9.1 Detect and Classification of Outside Fault xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-15
8.9.2 Heavy Fault of Outside Equipment xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-15
8.9.3 Light fault of Outside Equipment xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-16
8.10 Operation in Instantaneous Power Failure xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-17
8.10.1 Instantaneous Power Failure less than Permissible 20ms xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-17
8.10.2 Instantaneous Power Failure Exceeding Permissible 20ms xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-17
8.10.3 Instantaneous Power Failure During Redundant Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-18
8.11 History Log-In xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-
1 9
8.11.1 History Log-in and Content xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-19
8.11.2 Reset of Saved Information xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 8-19

Chapter 9. Error Remedy xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-1~9-10

9.1 Usage and Operation of Fault Mask xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-1


9.1.1 Usage and Operation of Fault Mask xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-1
9.1.2 How to Set Fault Mask xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-1
9.1.3 By Flag xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-1
9.1.4 By Parameter xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-1
9.2 I/O Skip(I/O Module, Extended Base Operation Miss Designated) xxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-2
9.2.1 Usage and Operation of I/O Skip xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-2
9.2.2 I/O Skip Setting and I/O Data Processing xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-2
9.2.3 Application to Redundant System xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-2
9.3 Module Replacement During Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-3
9.3.1 General of Module Replacement During Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-3
9.3.2 Replacement of CPU redundancy xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-3
9.3.3 Replacement of Switched Bass xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-4
9.3.4 Replacement of Redundant Bass xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-6

9.4 Error Remedy xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-


8
9.4.1 Segment of Errors xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-8
9.4.2 Standard Error Remedy xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-8
9.4.3 How to change by users xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-8
9.4.4 Detailed Error Task xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-9
9.4.5 Example of Error Task xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 9-10

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-1~10-13

10.1 Principle xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-


1
10.1.1 Triplexing of Digital Input xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-1
10.1.2 Redundancy of Digital Output xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-2
10.1.3 Redundancy of Analogue I/O Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-3
10.1.4 Parameter Setting xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-4
10.2 I/O Processing Procedures and Method xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-4
10.2.1 I/O Processing Procedures xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-4
10.2.2 Detailed Input Data Processing xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-5
10.2.3 Ex. Of Input Data Processing xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-6
10.2.4 Detailed Output Data Processing xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-10
10.2.5 Ex. Of Output Data Processing xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 10-11

Chapter 11. Flag Table xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 11-1~11-24

11.1 User Flag xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 11-


1
11.2 System Error Flag xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 11-
2
11.3 System Fault Mask Flag xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 11-
5
11.4 System Warning Flag xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 11-
7
11.5 System Error and Warning Details Flag xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 11-
9
11.6 System Operation Status Information Flag xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 11-
1 4
11.7 System Configuration Status Information Flag xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 11-17
11.8 Communication Flag xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 11-
1 9
11.9 Access Pass Registration of Flag xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 11-
2 2

Chapter 12. System Definition xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 12-1~12-7

12.1 Basic Parameter xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 12-


1
12.2 I/O Configuration Parameter xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 12-3
12.3 Communication Parameter xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 12-5
12.4 Redundant Parameter xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 12-
6

Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 13-1~13-5

13.1 Front Display xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 13-


1
13.2 Troubleshooting xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 13-
3

Chapter 14. Installation and Wring xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-1~14-13

14.1 Installation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-


1
14.1.1 Installation Environment xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-1
14.1.2 Precautions xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-3
14.1.3 Removal of Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-6
14.2 Wiring xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-
8
14.2.1 Power Wiring xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-8
14.2.2 I/O Device Wiring xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-10
14.2.3 Earth Wiring xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-10
14.2.4 Wiring Lead Specification xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-12
14.3 Trial Operation xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-
1 3
14.3.1 Checkpoint before Trial xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-13
14.3.2 Trial Procedures xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 14-13

Chapter 15. Maintenance xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 15-1~15-4

15.1 Maintenance and Check xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 15-


1
15.2 Daily Check xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 15-
1

15.3 Regular Check xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 15-


2
15.4 Replacement of Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 15-
2
15.5 Replacement of Batteryxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 15-
3
15.6 Replacement of Fuse xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 15-
4

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-1~16-13

16.1 Principle of Troubleshooting xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-


1
16.2 Troubleshooting xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-
1
16.2.1 Flow if Power LED extinguished xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-2
16.2.2 Remedy if Fail LED illumination xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-3
16.2.3 Remedy if 7-SEG code display S □□□ xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-3
16.2.4 Remedy if 7-SEG code display E □□□ xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-4
16.2.5 Output Module Operates Abnormally xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-5
16.2.6 Remedy if communication not connected properlyxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-6
16.2.7 Remedy of Interface Module Trouble xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-7
16.3 Troubleshooting Question Sheet xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-8
16.4 Each Example xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-
9
16.4.1 Trouble Type and Remedy of Input Circuit xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-9
16.4.2 Trouble Type and Remedy of Output Circuit xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 16-10

Chapter 17. Troubleshooting xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 17-1~17-6

17.1 Outside Dimension(Unit : mm) xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 17-1


17.1.1 Redundant Interface Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 17-1
17.1.2 Remote Interface Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 17-2
17.1.3 Redundant Base xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 17-3
17.1.4 Power Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 17-5
17.1.5 Extension Cable xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 17-6
17.1.6 Memory Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 17-6

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A1-1~A1-13

A1.1 System Block Diagram xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A1-


1
A1.2 Function Setting by Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A1-
2
A1.3 Function setting by Contact xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A1-
3
A1.4 Project xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A1-
4
A1.5 Ex. Of Program xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A1-
5

Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A2-1~A2-6

A2.1 Basic Function Table xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A2-


1
A2.2 Basic Function Block Table xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A2-
3
A2.3 Function Block for Communication Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A2-3
A2.4 Function Block for Special Module xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A2-4
A2.4.1 Function Block in One-side Operation(Attached at Switched Base) xxxxxxxxx A2-4
A2.4.2 Function Block in Redundant Operation(Attached at Redundant Base) xxx A2-4
A2.4.3 Function Block when installed at Remote(Installed at Remote Base) xxxxxxx A2-4
A2.5 Immediate I/O Function Block xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A2-
5

Appendix 3. I/O Contact/Variable Definition Table xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx A3-1~A3-4


Chapter 1. Introduction

Chapter 1. Introduction

1.1 How to Use This Manual

This User’s Manual describes the performance specification and operation of GLOFA redundant
system including GMR-CPUA. It also describes some communication structure and redundant use of
special module, and etc.
This manual provides the specification of CPU module, Power Module, Input/Output Module,
Basic/Extended Base, Interface Module, and Interrupt Module applied to base system and refers to the
following items and user’s manuals.

y CPU Module: GMR−CPUA, GMR−CPUB


y Redundant Interface Module: GMR−DIFA
y Power Module : GM3−PA□A, GM1−PA□A, GMR−PA□A, GMR−PA□B
y Input/Output Module: G3I−□□□□, G3Q−□□□□
y Redundant Basic Base : GMR-B 0 □M
y Extended Base : GMR−B □□E
y Power Redundant Remote Base: GM3−B08R, GM3-B08S
y Interface Module: GM2−FDIA, GM2−FRIC
y Interrupt Module: G3F−INTA

Refers to the following user’s manuals to make program.


y GLOFA PLC GMR Redundant System User’s Manual
y GLOFA PLC Instruction Glossary
y GLOFA PLC GMWIN User’s Manual

For detailed special and communication module, refer to the related user’s manual and technical data.

y User’s Manual of each special module


y User’s Manual of each communication module
y Communication Redundant Technical Data

1-1
Chapter 1. Introduction

1.2 Precautions

Take precautions to the followings for reliability and safety of system when installing this machine.

Item Section Description

y When installing this machine, keep the ambient temperature between


Condition 0 and 55°C concerning the temperature of an element.
Temperature y Don’t expose directly to sun.

y In high temperature, install fan and air conditioner but install heater to keep
Remedy
proper temperature, if low,

y Don’t form dew due to rapid temperature change.


Condition
y Install it in the control panel enabled for waterproof and dustproof.
Dewdrop
y Frequent Power On/Off may cause dewdrop due to changed temperature.
Remedy
In this case, power on at night.

Condition y Install in which there is no impulse or vibration.


Impulse y In case of serious impulse or vibration, take actions to prevent vibration
Remedy such
as vibroisolating rubber.
Condition y Install in which there is no corrosion gas.
Gas y If entering outside gas, take remedy for air purification of control panel at
Remedy
which the machine installed.
Condition y Install in which suitable for electro magnetic field.
y Select accurate path of wiring.
E.M.C y Make sure the shield installed properly in control panel.
Environment Remedy y For lighting of control panel, avoid a fluorescent light and use an
incandescent electric light.
y When installing Power Module, ground it on base potential.

1-2
Chapter 1. Introduction

1.3 Definition of Terms

Sect. Terms Definition


Standalone part and mounted on baseboard and etc. (CPU Module,
1 Module Power Module, Input/Output Module, Special Module, Communication
Module, and etc.)

Each module combined into opera table system (Basic Unit, Extended
2 Unit
Unit.

Fully equipped with component for PLC operation and controllable by


3 PLC System
user’s program.

When PLC system restarted, start type of user’s program. Consists of


4 Restart mode
Cold, Warm, and Hot Mode.

During normal program, the condition which should take precedence


5 Interrupt
over the others. Interrupt running program and proceed to it in advance.

Movement condition of program. Consists of Scan Task, Interval Task,


6 Task Internal Contact(Single) Task and Outside Contact(Interrupt) Task by
Input Contact of interrupt module.

When task occurred, the program of which movement condition set to


7 Task Program
Task enables to match with it.

When starting in Cold, Warm or Hot Restart mode, used to set system
8 Initialization Program defaults prior to task program running or run scan and task programs
after the object could be controlled.

The program not designated to Initialization or Task Program among


9 Scan Program user’s program, e.g. the program run repeatedly in sequence without
movement condition designated.

Input/Output Image Memory space in PLC having input module contacts to be output and
10
Space contacts to be output as a result of processing.

Instruction, operation Program operation unit; general term of operator, function and function
11
unit block such as LD(LOAD),AND,OR,ST(STORE).
Operation unit immediately output the result of operation without
12 FN:Function memorizing it in memory such as +/-/x/ ÷ operation and comparative
operation. Also called Function.

Operation unit with the result of operation in memory and used over
13 FB:Function block
several scans. Also called Function Block.

Variable without Name, type designated separately and corresponds to I,


14 Direct Variable
Q, M area. (%IX0.0.2, %QW1.2.1, %MD1234, and etc.)

1-3
Chapter 1. Introduction

Sect. Terms Definition

Variable with Name and Type designated by users. If designated as


‘INPUT_0’= %IX0.0.2, ‘RESULT’= %MD123, and etc., programmable
15 Symbolic variable
with the name of 'INPUT_0' and ‘RESULT’ instead of %IX0.0.2
and %MD1234.

While symbolic variable declares directly the correspondent memory


space in variable designating (see 15), this makes GMWIN assign the
area automatically only with name and type designated.
16 Auto variable
If declaring ‘INPUT_0’= BOOL, ‘RESULT’= DWORD, programmable with
the name of 'INPUT_0' and ‘RESULT’ and assigned with the position of
memory automatically.

If declaring the name of function block(instance name) when Function


Block used, the result of operation is memorized in memory with its
17 Instance memory
name. This time, memory area(set automatically in GMWIN) is called
Instance memory.
Variable valid only in one program block or function block. Used to
18 Local variable declare the program of respective block and to program it. Disabled
‘Read’ and ‘Write’ in other blocks.

Variable sharable between programs; symbolic variable declared as


Direct and Resource global variables. These have one memory
19 Resource global physically. Direct variable can be used directly in each program and
variable symbolic one is available after declaring it as ‘VAR-EXTERNAL’ with the
same name in respective programming.

Variable sharable between resources, e.g. between CPU in multi-CPU


system; symbolic variable declared as configuration global. These have
20 Configuration one memory on coordinator module physically. Available after declaring
global variable symbolic variable with same name as ‘VER-EXTERNAL’ in respective
programming (Disavailable in Redundant System).

General Purpose Computer built-in programming software available in


21 GMWIN
programming of GLOFA PLC series, editing, compiling, and debugging.

Communication method in high speed and periodically between PLC


22 Highway Link Hardware and Remote I/O, PLC and PLC, and PLC and computer
through GLOFA PLC Communication network (Enet, Fnet, and etc.).

FMM Module Communication module mounted on basic base in communication


23
(Fnet Master Module) system using Fnet(Fieldbus network) (Ex.: G3L-FUEA, G3L-FUOA)

FSM Module Communication module mounted on remote base in remote input/output


24
(Fnet Slave Module) system using Fnet(Fieldbus network) (Ex.: G3L-RBEA, G3L-RBOA)

25 FAM A series of PC built-in software for process monitoring and controlling.

1-4
Chapter 2. System Characteristics

Chapter 2 System Characteristics

2.1 Characteristics of Redundant Structure

This section provides how to establish redundant system in several types required by various
application fields.

(1) Perfect Redundant System


• GLOFA Redundant system provides perfect function through redundancy of CPU Module, Power
Module, Input/Output Module and network.
• Users can establish redundancy of CPU System, Input/Output, and Network selectively

(2) Redundant Function of CPU System


• If a failure of master CPU during parallel operation of two CPU, stand-by CPU continues to
operate as a master without interrupts.
• Since two CPU operate the same program simultaneously, there is no delay when transferring to
stand-by due to a failure of master.
• When restoring the operation of stand-by CPU, high-speed processing with control scan delay
time within 50ms.

(3) Redundancy of Input/Output System


1
• Good reliability and troubleshooting by three-way input.
• Prevents load operation stopped due to a failure of output by redundant output.
• Fault Detecting and Auto Interrupt of load power by output feedback.

(4) Redundant of Communication System


• Establishes redundant network with higher computer.
• Establishes redundant network between remote I/O and PLC.
• Allows dual cable of remote system to be installed.

(5) Redundancy of Power Module


• Provides redundant power to remote base connected to Input/Output Extended Base and
network besides Basic Redundant Base with CPU Module mounted.

2-1
Chapter 2. System Characteristics

2.2 Characteristics of CPU Module

GLOFA PLC Series have characteristics as follows.


y Selects International Specification communication protocol suitable for CIM
y Easy programming tool support
y Realizes highway process with built-in operation dedicated microprocessor
y Provides International Specification language
y Holds various special equipment
y Supports software package for powerful FA
y Supports monitoring device

GMR−CPUA/GMR-CPUB is CPU module having characteristics as follows.

(1) Highway Processing


Realizes highway processing of 0.12µs/Step with built-in operation dedicated microprocessor.

(2) Reinforced Self Test


Subdivides into detailed error code by contents and makes the probable cause of error founded
easily.

(3) Restart Mode Setting


Makes users set Cold, Warm, and Hot Restart mode according to its environment. Especially in
case of Hot Restart, enables users to control exact process with allowable time setting.

(4) Debug Operation


In PLC Operation Mode, enables on-line program debugging in DEBUG Mode.
Debugging functions as follows.
y Running one instruction one time.
y Running according to Break Point designation
y Running according to device status (Read, Write, Value)
y Running according to designated scan number

(5) Various Programming


Enables users to set various programming according to the condition such as Interrupt, Outside
Interrupt, and Inside Contact Interrupt Program besides Scan Program.

(6) Enables long data type (64Bit) and real number operation.

2-2
Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3.1 Redundant CPU System

Redundant CPU system can be realized through connecting two CPU systems to redundant base
as shown in the following figure. That is to say, if an error of master occurred during operation, GMR-B
automatically becomes master and continues operation. After a failure of GMR-A recovered, user can
switch the master to GMR-A using program tool and key switch.

GMR-A GMR-B
0 1 0 1
P C C P
O I I P D P I I O
W / / U I U / / W
E F F F F F E
R A B R
(Redundant Basic Base)

GMR-A GMR-B
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
P C C P
O I I I I P D P I I I I O
W / / / / U I U / / / / W
E F F F F F F F F F E
R A B R
(Extended Redundant Basic Base)

[Fig. 3.1] Slot of Redundant Basic Base

CPU-A, B : GMR-CPUA or GMR-CPUB Module


POWER : Power Module(Using GMR-PA1A/PA2A, GM1-PA1A/PA2A)
I/F : Communication Module(G3L-FUEA, G3L-EUEA, G3L-CUEA and etc.) or Long Distance
Interface Module
DIF : Interface Module between CPU
Base : GMR-B02M, GMR-B04M(Extended)

* Enables Distributed Control System to be configured with Communication Module mounted at I/F
Module mounting place.
* In Redundant Base, Redundant CPU is located at left and right with the center of DIF Module. (Both
of CPU O/S versions should be the same.) It should have the same kinds of module at position 0, 1,
2 and 3 of GMR-A and position 0, 1, 2 and 3 of GMR-B as shown in [Fig. 3.1].
In other words , If G3L-EUEA(Enet) module mounted at slot 0 of GMR-A, G3L-EUEA(Enet) module
should be also mounted at slot 0 of GMR-B.

3-1
Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3.2 Redundant Input/Output System

Input/Output depends on user’s selection and can be used as Redundant I/O, Switched I/O, One-
sided I/O, and its combination according to parameter setting.

3.2.1 Switched Input/Output


CPU-A and CPU-B operates simultaneously with the same program and data synchronized when
data synchronization required. If master stopped operation due to a failure of CPU, stand-by CPU
takes over the operation immediately and this time switched input/output enables continuous operation
without change of state.
In this structure, it called CPU redundant because no redundant Input/Output established. Set each
base to ‘Switched Input/Output’ at parameter setting. Stand-by CPU checks switched base for
connection periodically.

Redundant Basic Base


I I C D C I I
P P P P
/ / I / /
W U U W
R F F A F F F R
B
Switched
Input/Output

I I I I I I I I I I
P P
/ / / / / / / / / /
W W
R R O O O O O O O O F F

Sensor Connected to next switched


Load base

[Fig. 3.2] Example of Switched Input/Output

3-2
Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3.2.2 Redundant Input/Output(I/O Redundant)


CPU-A and CPU-B operates simultaneously with the same program and data synchronized when
data synchronization required. If master stopped operation due to a failure of CPU, stand-by CPU
takes over the operation immediately and this time I/O connected to master turns OFF among
Redundant I/O setting bases.
In this structure, both of master and stand-by CPU control I/O module and use the same value more
than 2 among 3 as input data, compared with Redundant I/O A, Redundant I/O B and Switched I/O.
In GMWIN, set each base to ‘Redundant I/O’ and both base number setting switch to the same
value. Also set the position of Switched I/O for input comparison and output feedback.

Redun. Base
P P
O I I C D C I I O
W / / P I P / / W
E F F U F U F F E
R A B R

Redundant Input/
Output A Redundant Input/Output B
중복 입출력 A Switc I/O 중복 입출력 B
P P P
O I I I I I I I I I O I I I I I I I I I I O I I I I I I I I I
W / / / / / / / / / W / / / / / / / / / / W / / / / / / / / /
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F F E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F
R R R

Connected to next base Connected다음


to 베이스
next base
다음 베이스 연결 연결 다음 베이스
Connected 연결 base
to next

Sensor
센서

부 하
Load

[Fig. 3.3] Example of Redundant I/O Base

3-3
Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3.2.3 One-sided Input/Output


CPU-A and CPU-B operates simultaneously with the same program and data synchronized when
data synchronization required. If CPU-A stopped operation due to a failure of CPU, attached I/O stops
the operation and the output connected to it turns OFF.

Set each base to ‘One-sided I/O’ and this structure is used when no backup required, saving costs of
entire redundancy.

Remarks

• One-sided I/O shall be installed only at CPU-A.


• One-sided I/O can be installed with only Digital Contact I/O Module.

The following shows the example of Redundant I/O, Switched I/O, One-sided I/O, and combined structure.
‘Switched I/O #1’ is used for switched I/O and ‘switched I/O #2’ for Redundant I/O.
Redundant Base

P P
O I I C D C I I O
W / / P I P / / W
E F F U F U F F E
R A B R

Switched I/O #1
P
O I I I I I I I I I I
W / / / / / / / / / /
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F F
R

Switched I/O #2
P
O I I I I I I I I I I
W / / / / / / / / / /
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F F
R

Redundant I/O Redundant I/O

P P
O I I I I I I I I I O I I I I I I I I I
W / / / / / / / / / W / / / / / / / / /
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F
R R

One-sided I/O

P
O I I I I I I I I I
W / / / / / / / / /
E 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 F
R

[Fig. 3.4] Example Combined with Switched, Redundant, and One-sided I/O

3-4
Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3.3 Basic I/O System

This connects Switched Base Unit and Redundant Base Unit to CPU Redundant Unit using Extended Cable.

0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3

Redundant P P
Basic 이중화 O I I I I C D C I I I I O
W / / / / P I P / / / / W
I/O #0기본베이스
#0
E F F F F U F U F F F F E
R A B R

SLOT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
x 32
x 16
Switched x 8
P P x 4
Base O O H R I I I I I I I I x 2
전환입출력 S T / / / / / / / /
I/O #1
베이스 W W x 1
E E C D O O O O O O F F
#1 R R
Base번호
베이스 No

SLOT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Switched P P
Base전환입출력 O O H R I I I I I I I I
베이스 W W S T / / / / / / / /
I/O #2
#2 E E C D O O O O O O F F
R R

SLOT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SLOT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Redundant Redunda-
P P
Base중복입출력 O I I I I I I I I I nt Base
중복입출력
O I I I I I I I I I
베이스(A) / / / / / / / / / 베이스(B) / / / / / / / / /
I/O(A) W W
#3 #3 E O O O O O O O O F I/O(A)
#3 #3 E O O O O O O O O F
R R

증설 베이스 8 슬롯

SLOT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SLOT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Redundant Redunda-
Base 중복입출력 P nt Base
중복입출력 P
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I/O(A)베이스(A)
#4 O
/ / / / / / / / /
베이스(B)
I/O(A) #4 O
/ / / / / / / / /
#4 W F #4 W F
E O O O O O O O O E O O O O O O O O
R R

[Fig. 3.5 GMR−CPUA] I/O System Structure of GMR Redundant System


1) System Structure
(1) Max. Base Number: 16(Base No.: #0~#15)
(2) Max. I/O Module Mounting Number: 120 Modules
(3) Max. I/O Point Number: 7,680 Points (When using 8 Slot Base/64 Points Module)
2) Install Distance
Entire extended distance of extended cable shall be within the specification of long distance interface
module.
3) Assignment of I/O Number
• I/O number is assigned with Redundant Basic Base set to ‘0’ and the other extended bases set in
accordance with Dip switch (mounted at Interface Module) of Extended Unit, from left of each base.
• 12-slot type base is assigned with two base numbers and base number set using Dip Switch shall be
even number.

3-5
Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

3.3.1 Program I/O Address Designation


(1) Operation will be started when I/O Module type setting parameter(I/O Parameter) matched with
actually mounted module type.
(2) Each slot of base will be assigned at 64 points from left regardless of the mounting and type of
module.
(3) I/O Contacts Designation
Actual Contacts correspond to Program Contacts as follows.
Input: %IX 0. 0. 0
Output: %QX 0. 1. 15
Indicates Contact Number of I/O Module between 0 and 63.

Indicates the number of slot at which I/O module mounted between 0 and 7.

Indicates the number of base between 0 and 15 with basic base 0.


(4) 12-slot base consists of
(5) Redundant Basic Base can be mounted with interface and communication modules and slot
number starts from left at both A and B.

Remarks
• Corresponding two contacts of Redundant Base have the same address.
• It is regarded as one contact in programming.

(6) Example of I/O Number Assignment


I/O Number Assignment if I/O Module mounted at No. 2 Base
Dash line indicates if 12-slot base used.

Slot Number: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3
P I I I I O O O O I O O O I
W N N N N U U U U N U U U /
R 16 16 32 64 T T T T 32 T T T F
16 32 32 64 16 32 32

%QX 3.3.0 ~ 31
%QX 3.2.0 ~ 31
%QX 3.1.0 ~ 15
%IX 3.0.0 ~ 31
%QX 2.7.0 ~ 63
%QX 2.6.0 ~ 31
%QX 2.5.0 ~ 31
%QX 2.4.0 ~ 15
%IX 2.3.0 ~ 63
%IX 2.2.0 ~ 31
%IX 2.1.0 ~ 15
%IX 2.0.0 ~ 15

3-6
Chapter 3. Redundant System Construction

Remarks

• Basic Base is assigned with Redundant Basic Base set to ‘0’ and the other extended bases set in accordance
with Dip switch (mounted at Interface Module) of Extended Unit.
• Never assign the same base number in Dip Switch Setting of Extended Base.
• 12-slot extended base is assigned with two base numbers. Dip Switch shall be even number. (If setting to No.
2, No. 2 and 3 bases will be occupied.)
• If 4-slot, 6-slot, and 12-slot type bases used, the total number of mounting module will be decreased.

3.3.2 Using Special Module


When using special module, there is no restriction for mounting position and used number of module.
Special Module is assigned with I/O Contact but not used in the program.
Special Module controls each module using dedicated function block and instance memory is
assigned automatically as function block used.
When establishing redundant special module, must use Special Rfb for redundancy.

3.3.3 Using Communication Module


(1) Ethernet, field bus module, and etc. can be mounted up to 4 only at basic base.
(2) Cnet I/F module can be mounted up to 8 between 0 and 3 slot of basic base and the 1st extended
switch base(Impossible to be mounted at 12-slot base).
(3) Highway link can operate with up to 4 modules designated.

3-7
Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table

Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table


This chapter describes the configuration of GLOFA GMR series.

4.1 Configuration

Stand-alone GLOFA GMR series consists of as shown in the following figure.

Battery Cable Diskette

Redundant
I/F
Memory module
module

Communi
-cation
module

Power module

Fuse
Basic base

Input
module

Extended base

Output
module

Spec
ial
module

Extended Switched I/O Commu


base Redundant I/O nication
module

4-1
Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table

4.2 Configuration Equipment

Configuration equipment of GLOFA GMR series is as follows.

[Table 4.1] Configuration Equipment Table


Item Name Config.name Description Remarks
Max. I/O
GMR-CPUA
(Direct:7,680points,Remote:32,000 points)
CPU Module
Program (CPUA: 512K byte, CPUB: 2M
GMR-CPUB
byte)
Memory Module G2M-M512 Capacity : 512k Step (2048k byte)
Used for GMR CPU Redundant
Redundant I/F Module GMR-DIFA
configuration
G3I-D22A DC12/24V Input 16 points
DC12/24V Stand-alone COM Input 16
G3I-D22C
points
G3I-D24A DC12/24V Input 32 points
G3I-D28A DC12/24V Input 64 points
G3I-A12A AC110V Input 16 points
G3I-A14A AC110V Input 32 points
G3I-A22A AC220V Input 16 points
G3I-A24A AC220V Input 32 points
I/O Module
G3Q-RY2A Relay Output 16 points
G3Q-RY4A Relay Output 32 points
G3Q-TR2A TR Output 16 points
G3Q-TR4A TR Output 32 points (Sink)
G3Q-TR4B TR Output 32 points (Source)
G3Q-TR8A TR Output 64 points (Sink)
G3Q-TR8B TR Output 64 points (Source)
G3Q-SS2A SSR Output 16 points
G3Q-SS4A SSR Output 32 points
GMR-B02M Basic Base 2 Slot
Redundant Basic Base
GMR-B04M Basic Base 4 Slot

Switched GMR-B08E Extended Base for Switched I/O, 8 Slot


I/O GMR-B12E Extended Base for Switched I/O, 12 Slot
Extended GM2-B06E Extended Base for Redundant I/O, 6 Slot
Base
Redundant GM2-B08E Extended Base for Redundant I/O, 8 Slot
I/O
GM2-B12E Extended Base for Redundant I/O, 12 Slot

4-2
Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table

Item Name Config.name Description Remarks


Remote y Remote Basic Base for Power
Basic GM3-B08R
Base for redundancy, 8 slot
Power
y Remote Extended Base for Power
redundan Extended GM3-B08S
redundancy, 8 slot
cy
Driver y Mounted at Basic Base
GM2-FDIA
Module Max. Used Distance : 100m
Direct
y Mounted at Extended Base
Extended GM2-FRIA
Interface Receiver (for 4/6/8 slot base)
Module Module y Mounted at Extended Base
GM2-FRIC
(for 4/6/8/12 slot base)
GMR-PA1A AC110V
DC5V : 12A
GMR-PA2A AC220V
GMR-PA1B AC110V
DC5V : 6A, DC24V : 1.5A
GMR-PA2B AC220V
GM1-PA1A AC110V
Power Module DC5V : 12A
GM1-PA2A AC220V
GM3-PA1A AC110V
DC5V : 6A, DC24V : 1.5A
GM3-PA2A AC220V
G3F-PA1A +15V : 2A AC110V
Special Module Exter-
G3F-PA2A -15V : 1.2A nal power supply AC220V
G2C-E031 Length 0.3m Cable type can
G2C-E061 Length 0.6m be added if
required by
Extended Cable G2C-E121 Length 1.2m
users(see
G2C-E401 Length 4.0m catalogue).
G2C-E □□□□ Customized (10m unit, up to 100m)
Voltage/Current Input, 16-channel
G3F-AD4A
(DC-5 ~ +5V/-10V, DC-20 ~ +20mA)
A/D
Voltage/Current Input, 16-channel
Conversion G3F-AD4B
(DC1 ~ 5V, DC 4 ~ 20mA)
Module
Voltage/Current Input, 8-channel
G3F-AD3A
Special (DC1 ~ 5V/0 ~ 10V, DC 4 ~ 20mA)
Module Voltage Output, 16 channel, DC -5 ~ +5V/-
G3F-DA4V 10 ~ +10V
D/A Current Output, 16 Channel, DC 4 ~ 20Ma
Conversion G3F-DA4I
Module Voltage Output, 8 channel, DC 0 ~ +10V
G3F-DA3V
Current Output, 8 Channel, DC 4 ~ 20mA
G3F-DA3I

4-3
Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table

Item Name Config.name Description Remarks


y Thermocouple Input of 16 channel
G3F-TC4A y Input : K, J, E, T, B, R, S
Temp. y Cold Contact Auto Compensation
Conversion y 8-channel temperature measuring resistor
Module input(3 line type)
G3F-RD3A
y Measuring Temperature : −200 ~ 600°C
Special y Detecting of short
Module PID control y Max. 32 Loop Control
G3F-PIDA/B
module y Static/Dynamic operation conversion
Analogue G3F-AT4A y 16-point analogue timer
timer module y On-Delay operation
Highway
y 2 channel y 1/2/4 multiplying
counter G3F-HSCA
y 24 bit(0~16,777,215) counting range
module
y Fieldbus specification standard
y 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable
G3L-FUEA
Used)
y Available for GM 1/2/3 series

y Fieldbus specification standard


G3L-FUOA y 1Mbps Base Band(Optical Cable Used)
y Available for GM 1/2/3 series

y Fieldbus specification standard


y 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable
G0L-FUEA
Used)
Commu y Available for IBM PC compatible series
Fnet I/F
nication
Module y Fieldbus specification standard
Module
y 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable
G3L-RBEA
Used)
y Available for GM3 Basic base series

y Fieldbus specification standard


G3L-RBOA y 1Mbps Base Band(Optical Cable Used)
y Available for GM3 Basic base series
y Fieldbus specification standard
y 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable
G0L-SMQA Used)
y Stand-alone Remote(Relay Output 16
point)

4-4
Chapter 4. Configuration and Products Table

Item Name Config.name Description Remarks


y Fieldbus Specification based Repeater
y 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable
G0L-FREA
Used)
y Available for max. 6 units connection
y Fieldbus Specification based E.O.C(Optic
↔ Electric
G0L-FOEA Converter)
y 1Mbps Base Band
y Available for max. 6 units connection
y Fieldbus Specification based Active
G0L-FAPA Coupler
G0L-FABA (Optical Signal Divider)
G0L-FACA y 1Mbps Base Band
y Max. 8 modules connection(per one unit)
Fnet I/F
Module y Fieldbus Specification Standard
y 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable
Used)
G3L-FURA
y Available for GM1/2/3 series
y Provides Network/Cable redundancy to
Communication Redundant Master Station
Commu
nication y Fieldbus Specification Standard
Module y 1Mbps Base Band(Twisted Pair Cable
Used)
G3L-RBRA y Available for GM3 basic base series
y Provides Network/Cable redundancy to
Communication Redundant Slave Station
y Provides Power Redundant Function

y User-defined communication enabled with


Cnet I/F the other equipment
G3L-CUEA
Module y PC connection with built-in Protocol
yModem/Dedicated Modem communication

y User-defined communication enabled with


the other Ethernet equipment
(Max. one channel)
Enet I/F y Dedicated communication with PC and
G3L-EUEA
Module MMI(Max. 16 channels)
y Highway Link Communication/FB
Communication
y 10 Base 2, 10 Base 5, 10 Base T Support

4-5
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

Chapter 5. Product Specifications


5.1 General Specifications
Table 5.1 describes the common specification of each module used in GLOFA PLC redundant series.
[Table 5.1] General Specifications

No Item Specification Related Spec.

1 Operating 0 ~ 55℃
Temp.
2 Storage -25 ~ 70℃
Temp.
3 Operating 5 ~ 95%RH, non-condensing
Moist.
4 Storage 5 ~ 95%RH, non-condensing
Moist.
For discontinuous vibration
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Number
10≤f∠57 Hz - 0.075mm
Vibration 57 ≤f≤150 Hz 9.8m/s2(1G) -
5 IEC 61131-2
proof For continuous vibration Each 10 times in
X, Y, Z
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude direction
10≤f∠57 Hz - 0.035mm
2
57≤f≤150 Hz 4.9m/s (0.5G) -
• Max. impact acceleration : 147m/s2(15G)
6 Impact proof • Authorized time : 11ms IEC 61131-2
• Pulse wave : Sign half-wave pulse(each 3 times in X, Y, Z
3 direction)
Test spec.
Square wave impulse ±1,500 V reference within
noise LGIS
Static electric Voltage :4kV(Contact discharging) IEC 61131-2
discharging IEC 1000-4-2
Radiation electro- 27 ~ 500 MHz, 10V/m IEC 61131-2
7 Noise proof magnetic field noise IEC 1000-4-3
Digital I/O
(24Vor less)
Power Digital I/O Analogue
Fast transient/burst Segment Module (24V more) Input/Output IEC 61131-2
noise Communication IEC 1000-4-4
Interface
Voltage 2kV 1kV 0.25kV
8 Ambient No corrosive gas and dust
conditions
9 Operating 2,000m or less
height
10 Pollution level 2 or less
11 Cooling type Natural air cooling

Remark
1) IEC(International Electro-technical Commission)
: International Electro-technical Commission, International non-governmental organization enacting international
standards of electric and electronic fields.
2) Pollution
: Index indicating the pollution of operating environment to determine the insulation capacity of equipment. Pollution
Grade 2 means when only non-conductive pollution normally occurred. But, temporary conduction can be occurred due
to condensing.

5-1
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.2 Redundant Module Specifications

5.2.1 CPU Module Specifications (GMR-CPUA/GMR-CPUB)


[Table 5.2] CPU Module Performance Specifications
Performance Specifications
Item Remarks
GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB
Repetitive operation, Positive cycle operation, interrupt
Control Method
operation
Immediate I/O
I/O Control Method Scan Batched Processing Enabled by immedia-
te I/O Function

LD (Ladder Diagram)
Program Language IL (Instruction List)
SFC (Sequential Function Chart)

Operator LD:13 EA, IL:21 EA


Basic Function 156 EA Refer to Appendix
Language
Basic Function Function/Function
Type 11 EA
Block Block Table
Dedicated Redundant dedicated function block by special function
Function Block modules
Operator 0.12 µs / Command

Operation Basic Function Refer to Appendix


Processing Basic Function 0.12 µs / Step Function/Function
Speed Block Block Table
Real Floating-point operation: several nos. us, Trigonometric
Operation function operation: 10~30us
Program Memory 2M byte (256K Step
512K byte(128K Step)
Capacity + Program Memory)

3,840 points(Using 32-point module)


I/O point 7,680 points(Using 64-point module)
About 32,000 points(Through Network)

Direct Variable 0 K ~ 64 Kbyte(Operation delay time increased in stand-by


Parameter setting
Area movement as the size of operation area: 2ms/1Kbyte)
Data
Memory 256 Kbyte Direct Variable Area(Operation delay time
Symbolic Variable increased in stand-by movement as operation amount:
Area 2ms/1Kbyte)
Not limited by points Holding 8 byte of
Timer Range: Between 0.001 and 4294967.295 seconds(1,193 symbolic variable per
hours) 1 point
Holding 8 byte of
Not limited by points
Count symbolic variable per
Range : -32,768 ~ +32,767
1 point
Operation Mode RUN, STOP, DEBUG
Data Retain in a power
Set to Retain in Variable Definition
failure

5-2
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

Performance Specifications
Item Remark
GMR-CPUA GMR-CPUB

Program Block No. 180 EA


180 EA(Number of Program Block registered as Task
Scan
program)
Positive Period
32 EA
Task
Stand-by Task
Program Outside Contact 16 EA Process by Program
Type Task
Block Unit
Inside Contact
16 EA
Task
Initialization 2 EA(_INIT, _H_INIT)
Error Process 1 EA(_ERR_SYS)

Master/Stand-by operation monitoring


Self-monitoring Operation delay, memory error, I/O error, battery error,
and power error and etc.

Restart Mode Cold, Warm, (Hot Restart)


Total 16(Redundant Base B is able to be installed
Extended Base No.
additionally)
Base unit configura-
I/O configuration Redundant I/O, Switched I/O, One-sided I/O
tion
Master/Stand-by
Within 50ms
Switchover Time
Within 50ms (When using within standard memory: Within
Delay time in stand-by 10Kbyte)
operation If using exceeding standard memory, 2ms increased per
1Kbyte.
Increased in proportional to operation I/O point, I/O
Delay time in redundant
configuration, communication module operation no.,
operation
special
module operation, and etc.
Master/Stand-by Auto Switch: CPU
Auto switch by heavy fault, switch by programmer, switch
Switchover Shutdown, abnormal
by key.
operation

Communication
Communication module redundancy, cable redundancy
Redundancy

5-3
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.2.2 Each Part Name of CPU Module


This section describes each part name of GMR-CPUA/B module.

7 SEG : Displays CPU operation and error


status.
Front Display
RUN, STOP, REMOTE, ERROR, FAIL LED :
Displays CPU operation. ∗1

Mode Key(RUN, REMOTE, STOP) : Sets CPU


operation mode. ∗2

Manual Reset Switch: System restart. ∗3

RS-232C Connector: Connects with peripheral


equipment

Memory module mounting connector: Connects


between CPU and memory module.

Battery mounting connector : Connects between


CPU and back up battery.

5-4
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

∗1
LED Display 7-Segment Operation
RUN STOP REMOTE ERROR FAIL Status Mode

On Off Off Off Off LrUn Local Run


Off On Off Off Off Stop Local Stop
On Off On Off Off rrUn Remote Run
Off On On Off Off Stop Remote Stop
On Off On Off Off dbg Remote Debug
E○○○
X X X On Off Error
S○○○
X X X X On − Module Failure

∗2
Mode Key Position Operation Mode
STOP → REM Remote Stop
REM → RUN Local Run
RUN → REM Remote Run
REM → STOP Local Stop

Remarks

∗ Remote Mode Change (By GMWIN or Communication) is enabled only when Mode Key set to ‘REM’
Remote (Refers to ‘6.2.4 How to change program run mode’)

∗ 3 Manual Reset Switch Operations


Manual Reset Switch
Operation
Operation

Within 5 seconds ‘rSt’ is displayed in 7-Segment and restarted in Cold or Warm mode
(Press→Release) as setting parameter

More than 5 seconds ‘rSt c’ is displayed in 7-Segment and restarted in Cold mode
(Press→Release) unconditionally when switch released.

5-5
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.2.3 Battery Specifications


This describes battery specifications available in GMR−CPUA/B module.

Item Specification
Rated Voltage DC 3.0 V
Warranty period 5 years
Usage User program and data backup, RTC operation in a power failure
Specification Lithium 3V, CR1/2AA, VARTA

Remarks

∗ Warranty period and back-up time due to a power failure can be varied as operating temperature.

5-6
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.2.4 Redundant Interface Module Specifications(GMR-DIFA)

A+B, A SEL, B SEL, CPU−A, CPU−B LED :


Displays redundant setting mode and operating
master ∗1

Redundant Setting Key (A+B, A SEL, B SEL) :


Sets redundant system operation ∗2

DIF module connecting/disconnecting power cable


t d i ti

RS−232C Connector: connects to GMWIN.

*1 Status Display LED


LED
Operation
A+B A SEL B SEL CPU-A CPU-B
ON OFF OFF ON OFF CPU-A as a mater in Redundant Operation Mode.
ON OFF OFF OFF ON CPU-B as a mater in Redundant Operation Mode.
OFF ON OFF ON OFF CPU-A as one-sided operation
OFF OFF ON OFF ON CPU-B as one-sided operation

*2 Operation Setting by Redundant Setting Key


Mode Key Position Operation Setting
A+B Redundant Operation
A SEL Only CPU-A operation
B SEL Only CPU-B operation

5-7
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.2.5 CPU Redundant Base Specifications (GMR-B02M, GMR-B04M)

(1) GMR−B02M

Base Mounting Guide Hole: Remote interface driver, communication


To mount Control Panel with this module connector
base module
Redundant Interface
Module Connector Each Module Interlocking
Power Module Hook
Connector

Redundant IF
Module
connect/disconnect
cable connector
Power
Module
Connector

FG Terminal: CPU Base Module Set Screw:


Ground terminal Connector Each Module Set Hole:
connected with Screw Hole setting base If setting each module,
shield pattern of Remote interface module to panel insert HOOK of each
PCB bhoard driver, communication module and set the
module connector module.

* There are ‘Interface Driver and Communication Module Mounting Slot’ set to 2 slot (See Above
Figure) and Extended(4-slot:GMR-B04M) in redundant base.

(2) GMR-B04M

5-8
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.2.6 Extended Base Specifications


1) Switched Input/Output Extended Base (GMR-B08E, GMR-B012E)

Slot No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
I/O/Communic

I/O/Communic

I/O/Communic

I/O/Communic
GMR-B08E

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/F(FRIC)

I/F(FRIC)
PWR

PWR
ation

ation

ation

ation

Slot No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3
GMR-B12E

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module
I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/F (FRIC)

I/F (FRIC)
PWR

PWR

Base N Base N+1

I/O Module: Digital I/O Module, Special Module(Position Control Module Diavailable), Interrupt Module
I/O, Communication: Computer Communication(Cnet) Module can be mounted in Slot 0 through 3 of
the first Switched Base with Base No. set to 1.(Disabled in 12-slot type base)
12-slot base operates with the same of that attached with 2 bases(Slot 0 through 7 are designated
with the number set in Interface and next Slot 0 through 3 recognized as Slot 0 through 3 of the next
base number.

2) Redundant I/O Extended Base (GM2-B08E,GM2-B06E,GM2-B04E,GM2-B12E)

Slot No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
GM2-B08E

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module
I/F(FRIC)

I/F(FRIC)
PWR
GM2-B06E

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module
I/F(FRIC)

I/F(FRIC)
PWR

I/O Module: Digital I/O Module, Analogue Module


GM2-B04E

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module
I/O(I/F)

I/F(FRIC)

(A/D, D/A:16 Channel Voltage Type, TC, RTD) Mountable


PWR

Interrupt, Position Control, Highway Counter Module Disavailable


I/O(I/F) : I/O Module Mountable
FRIC Mounted when used as Switched Base

Slot No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3
GM2-B12E

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/O Module

I/F(FRIC)

I/F(FRIC)
I/O Module

I/O Module
PWR

Base N Base N+1

5-9
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.2.7 Power Redundant Module Specifications


1) Usage
• Used to prevent a failure using two power modules in a base.
• Used in Redundant Basic Base and Switched I/O Base.

2) Type
• There are 4 types of GMR-PA1A, GMR-PA2A, GMR-PA1B, GMR-PA2B as operating Input Power
Voltage and Output Power/Voltage.
• For detailed, refer to ‘5.3 Power Module’.

3) How to replace power module


(1) Check the power module for error on Switched Base:
If an error occurred in any of redundant power modules, system operates normally and raises
warning message.
If power error occurred in Switched Base, ‘_E_RPWR_WR’(Redundant Power Error of
Extended Base)flag turns ON among System Warning Flags. Users replace the power module
with LED off among Switched Base connected to the channel of which Error LED illuminated in
Interface Driver Module(FDIA).

(2) Replace Power Module:


Any power module due to an error or old should be replaced immediately. Remove the power
module during normal operation and mount new module. This time you should use redundant
power module.

5-10
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.3 Power Module

This describes type, specification and selection method of power module.

5.3.1 Performance Specifications


This table describes performance specifications of power module
Specification
Item GMR−PA1A GMR−PA1B GMR−PA2A GMR−PA2B
GM1−PA1A GM3−PA1A GM1−PA2A GM3−PA2A
Base Mounting
Mounted at Power Module Slot
Position
Input Power AC 110V(−15% ~ +10%) AC 220V(−15% ~ +10%)
Input Frequency 50/60Hz ± 3Hz
Input Power 2.5A(Max. Load) 1.5A(Max. Load)
Rush Current 40A or less : AC 264V (AC 132V) Power Input

Rated Output Power 12A(5V) 6A(5V)/1.5A(24V) 12A(5V) 6A(5V)/1.5A(24V)

∗ 1 Overcurrent 7.5~13A(5V) 7.5~13A(5V)


13~20A(5V) 13~20A(5V)
Protection 1.6~3A(24V) 1.6~3A(24V)
Efficiency 70% or more
Power Display LED ON in power input
Suitable Lead Spec. 1.5 ~ 2.5mm2 (AWG16 ~ 22)
Suitable Tightening
12kg ‚ cm
Torque
Weight 0.7kg or less
Fuse Rated AC 250V, 5A
∗ 2 Allowable
Instantaneous Within 20ms
Electrostatic
[Table 5.3] Power Module Performance Specifications

Remarks

∗1 : Overcurrent Protection
y If applied with the current exceeding the specification in DC 5V, DC24V circuit, overcurrent protection
device shuts off the circuit and makes the system stopped.
y If this device operated, remove the cause of lack in current capacity, short, and etc. and then restart
the system.
y If system doesn’t operate with LED exhausted, it is necessary to replace the power module.

∗2 : Allowable Instantaneous Electrostatic


y It means the time elapsed from Input Power Off until output voltage becomes below 4.75V
in DC 5V.

5-11
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.3.2 Power Module Selection


Power Module is selected as the sum of consumption current of each CPU, I/O, Special Module,
and etc., where supplied with power from Power Module. In power redundant configuration, use GMR-
PA1A(2A) Module. When selecting power module in accordance with consumption current, calculate it
with one power module capacity even in power redundant configuration.

1) Consumption Current of each module


Table 5.4 describes the consumption current of each module.
Select the power module in accordance with system configuration.

(Unit:mA)
Config. Name Consumption Current Config. Name Consumption Current
GMR-CPUA G3Q-SS2A 370
1,200
GMR-CPUB G3Q-SS4A 690
GMR-DIFA 250 G3F-INTA 190
GM2-FDIA 630 G3F-AD4A 670
GM2-FRIA 670 G3F-AD4B 540
GM2-FRIB 690 G3F-AD3A 610
G3I-D22A 70 G3F-DA4V 200
G3I-D22C 70 G3F-DA4I 200
G3I-D24A 140 G3F-DA3V 600
G3I-D28A 150 G3F-DA3I 70
G3I-A12A 70 G3F-TC4A 350
G3I-A14A 140 G3F-RD3A 440
G3I-A22A 70 G3F-PIDA 200
G3I-A24A 140 G3F-AT4A 240
G3Q-RY2A 110 G3F-HSCA 300
G3Q-RY4A 220 G3L-CUEA 150
G3Q-TR2A 120 G3L-FUEA 170
G3Q-TR4A 220 G3L-FUOA 130
G3Q-TR4B 200 G3L-RBEA 160
G3Q-TR8A 300 G3L-RBOA 170
G3Q-TR8B 280 G3L-EUEA 290

[Table 5.4] Consumption Current of Each Module(DC 5V Standard)

5-12
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.3.3 Each Part Name


This describes each part name of Power Module.

PWR
Power LED : DC5V Power Display LED

Power Fuse and Fuse Holder :


AC Input Power AC110V ~ AC220V
3A Fuse as Holder

Power Input Terminal : As Power Input


Terminal, connects AC power of
AC110V or AC220V.

LG Earth : Has a half potential of earth


and input power of Power Filter.

DC24V, DC24G Terminal : Supplies


with Module using 24V inside of Output
Module(Using External Wiring).

5-13
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.4 I/O Module Operation Specifications

In Redundant System Configuration, there are some limitations when using special module. See the
following to match with system configuration.

5.4.1 Operation Specifications of basic system


1) Basic Base:
Redundant Basic Base can only be mounted with Interface Module and next upper system for
installing Extended Base and Communication Module for communication with the other PLC
system and remote I/O system.

2) Switched Base:
• Special Module: Any Modules excepting Position Control(G3F-POPA, G3F-POAA, and etc.) and
Communication Module (But, Slot 0 through 3 set as No. 1 of 8-slot type switched bases can be
mounted with Computer Communication Module).

• Digital I/O: All kinds of I/O Module

3) Redundant Base:
• Special Module: A/D Module, D/A Module, TC Input Module, RTD Input Module
- If receiving redundant ‘A/D Input Module’ in a sensor, only Circuit configuration for voltage
input can be used.
- If using redundant ‘D/A output Module’ as a package, only 16 Channel Voltage Output Type
Module can be used.
- TC, RTD module should be installed with two sensors respectively.
• Digital I/O: ‘DC Input Module’ and ‘TR Source Output Module’ are recommended to be used.
(See ‘Chapter 10 Input Triplex, Output redundancy’)

5-14
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.5 I/O Module

This describes I/O Module and Interrupt Module used commonly in GLOFA PLC GMR GM1, GM2,
and GM3.

5.5.1 Precautions when selecting I/O Module


This describes precautions when selecting I/O Module of GLOFA PLC.
(1) Take consideration in desired response time because of different delay time according to I/O
module.

(2) Select input module with input voltage in considerations.


(3) Use the output module not exceeding rated open/close capacity.
(4) Check the authorized voltage to load is AC or DC.
(5) Take precautions of SSR Output Module in case of load with low power factor or inductive load.
If using relay output module, the life of module will be reduced.
(6) I/O Module has semi-permanent life using semi-conductor, but relay module has the limited life
due to mechanical switching.
(7) Relay output module has the life as shown in the below figure.
Select module with considerations of load characteristics.
Open/Close Life

Open/Close

5-15
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.6 I/O Module Specifications

5.6.1 I/O Module Performance Specifications


(1) 16-point DC 12/24V Input Module Specifications

Config. Name DC Input Module


Spec. G3I−D22A
Input Point 16-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
Rated Input Voltage DC 12V DC 24V
Rated Input Current 5 mA 11 mA
Operating Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V (Within 5% of ripple rate)
Max. Simultaneous Input Point 100% (8-point/1COM) Simultaneous ON
ON Voltage/ON Current DC 9.5V or more/4.0mA or more
OFF Voltage/OFF Current DC 6V or less/1.0mA or less
Input Resistance About 2.2 kΩ
Response OFF→ON 10 ms or less
Time ON→OFF 10 ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 70mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON.
External Connection Method 20-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 Screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.37kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

Inside Circuit

DC In

DC In

Terminal No

5-16
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(2) 32-point DC 12/24V Input Module Specifications


Config. Name DC Input Module
Specification G3I-D24A
Input Point 32-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
Rated Input Voltage DC 12V DC 24V
Rated Input Current 5 mA 11mA
Operating Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V (Within 5% of ripple rate)
Max. Simultaneous Input Point 60% (5-point/1COM) Simultaneous ON
ON Voltage/ON Current DC 9.5V or more/4.0mA or more
OFF Voltage/OFF Current DC 6V or less/1.0mA or less
Input Resistance About 2.2 kΩ
Response OFF→ON 10 ms or less
Time ON→OFF 10 ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 140mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON.
External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 Screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.46kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

DC
In
Inside Circuit

Terminal No
DC In

5-17
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(3) 16-point DC 12/24V Input Module(Stand-alone COM) Specifications


Config. Name DC Input Module
Spec. G3I-D22C
Input Point 16-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
Rated Input Voltage DC 12V DC 24V
Rated Input Current 5mA 11mA
Operating Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V (Within 5 % of ripple rate)
Max. Simultaneous Input Point 100% (5-point/1COM) Simultaneous ON
ON Voltage/ON Current DC 9.5V or more/4.0mA or more
OFF Voltage/OFF Current DC 6V or less/1.0mA or less
Input Resistance About 2.2kΩ
OFF→ON 10ms or less
Response time
ON→OFF 10ms or less
Common Method 1-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 70mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with input ON
External Connection Method 38-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.46 kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

Terminal No

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

5-18
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(4) 64-point DC 12/24V Input Module Specifications


Config. Name DC Input Module
Spec. G3I-D28A
Input Point 64-point
Insulation Method Photo Coupler Insulation
Rated Input Voltage DC 12V DC 24V
Rated Input Current 3mA 7mA
Operating Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V (Within 5 % of ripple rate)
Max. Simultaneous Input Point 60% (19-point/1COM) simultaneous ON
ON Voltage/ON Current DC 9.5V or more/4.0mA or more
OFF Voltage/OFF Current DC 6V or less/1.0mA or less
Input Resistance About 3.3kΩ
Response OFF→ON 10ms or less
Time ON→OFF 10ms or less
Common Method 32-point/1COM (Common Pin : 17, 18, 19, 20, 37, 38, 39, 40)
Inside Consumption Current 150mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON
External Connection Method 40-pin 2 connectors
Weight (Kg) 0.46kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

Inside
Circuit

Inside
Circuit

DC In DC In

5-19
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(5) 16-point AC 110V Input Module Specifications


Config. Name AC 110V Input Module
Spec. G3I−A12A
Input Point 16-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
Rated Input Voltage AC 100V~120V (50/60Hz)
Rated Input Current 11Ma (AC 110V/60Hz)
Operating Voltage AC 85~132V(50/60Hz±3Hz)
Max. Simultaneous Input Point 100% (8-point/1COM) simultaneous ON
Rush Current Within Max. 300mA 0.3 ms (AC 132V)
ON Voltage/ON Current AC 80V or more/6mA or more
OFF Voltage/OFF Current AC 30V or less/3mA or less
Input Impedance 약 10kΩ
Response OFF→ON 15ms or less
Time ON→OFF 25ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 70mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON
External Connection Method 20-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.42kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

Inside
Circuit

AC110V
IN

AC110V
IN

AC110V
IN

Terminal
No

5-20
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(6) 32-point AC 110V Input Module Specifications


Config. Name AC 110V Input Module
Spec. G3I-A14A
Input Point 32-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
Rated Input Voltage AC 100V~120V(50/60Hz)
Rated Input Current 11mA(AC 110V/60Hz)
Operating Voltage AC 85~132V(50/60Hz±3Hz)
Max. Simultaneous Input
60%(5-point/1COM) simultaneous ON
Point
Rush Current Within Max. 300mA 0.3ms (AC 132V)
ON Voltage/ON Current AC 80V or more/6mA or more
OFF Voltage/OFF Current AC 30V or less/3mA or less
Input Impedance About 10kΩ
Response OFF→ON 15ms or less
Time ON→OFF 25ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 140mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON
External Connection Method 38-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.56kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

AC110V
IN

Inside
Circuit

AC110v
IN

AC110v
IN
Terminal No

5-21
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(7) 16-point AC 220V Input Module Specifications


Config. Name AC 220V Input Module
Spec. G3I−A22A
Input Point 16-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
Rated Input Voltage AC 200V~240V(50/60Hz)
Rated Input Current 11mA(AC 220V/60Hz)
Operating Voltage AC 170~264V(50/60Hz±3Hz)
Max. Simultaneous Input Point 100%(8-point/1COM) simultaneous ON
Rush Current Within 600mA 0.12 ms (AC 264V)
ON Voltage/ON Current AC 150V or more/4.5mA or more
OFF Voltage/OFF Current AC 50V or less/3.0mA or less
Input Impedance About 20kΩ
Response OFF→ON 15ms or less
Time ON→OFF 25ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 70mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Input ON
External Connection Method 20-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.42kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

Inside Circuit

AC110v
IN

AC110v
IN

AC110v
IN

Terminal No

5-22
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(8) 32-point AC 220V Input Module Specifications


Config. Name AC 220V Input Module
Spec. G3I-A24A
Input Point 32-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
Rated Input Voltage AC 200V~240V(50/60Hz)
Rated Input Current 11mA(AC 220V/60Hz)
Operating Voltage AC 170~264V(50/60Hz±3Hz)
Max. Simultaneous Input
60%(8 point/1COM) simultaneous ON
Point
Rush Current Within 600mA 0.12 ms (AC 264V)
ON Voltage/ON Current AC 150V or more/4.5mA or more
OFF Voltage/OFF Current AC 50V or less/3.0mA or less
Input Impedance About 20kΩ
Response OFF→ON 15ms or less
Time ON→OFF 25ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 140mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Input On
External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.56kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

Inside
Circuit

Terminal No

5-23
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.6.2 Output Module Specifications


(1) 16-point relay output module specifications
Config. Name Relay Output Module
Spec. G3Q−RY2A
Output Point 16-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
RatedOpen/Close
DC 24V 2A(resistance load) , AC 220V/2A(COSΨ=1)/1-point, 8A/1COM
Voltage/Current
Min.Open/Close Voltage/Current DC 5V/1mA
Max.Open /Close Voltage/Current AC 250V, DC 150V
Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA(AC 220V, 60Hz)
Max. Open/Close Frequency 3,600 times/hours
Surge Killer Varister
Mechanical More than 20 million times
Rated Open/close Voltage/Current load 0.1 million times or more
Life AC 200V/1.5A, AC 240V/1A(COSΨ=0.7) 0.2 million times or more
Electrical
AC 200V/1A, AC 240V/0.5A(COSΨ=0.35) 0.2 million times or more
DC 24V/1A, DC 100V/0.1A(L/R=7ms) 0.2 million times or more
External Power Voltage DC 24V±10%(less than 4 Vp-p of ripple voltage)
Supply Current 150mA or less(TYP. DC 24V all points ON)
OFF→ON 10ms or less
Response Time
ON→OFF 12ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
InsideConsumption Current 110mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with output ON
External Connection Method 20-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.46kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

External Load

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

5-24
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(2) 32-point Relay Output Module Specifications


Config. Name Relay Output Module
Spec. G3Q−RY4A
Output Point 32-point
Insulation Method Photo Coupler Insulation
Rated Open/Close
DC 24V/1A (resistance load), AC 220V/1A(COS Ψ=1)/1-point, 5A/1COM
Voltage/Current
Min. Open/Close
DC 5V/1mA
Voltage/Current
Max. Open/Close
AC 270V, DC 150V
Voltage/Current
Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA(AC 220V, 60Hz)
Max.Open/Close
3,600 times/hour
Frequency
Surge Killer None
Mechanical 20 million times or more
Rated Open/close Voltage/Current load 0.1 million times or more
Life AC 200V/1.5A, AC 240V/1A(COSΨ=0.7) 0.2 million times or more
Electrical AC 200V/1A, AC 240V/0.5A(COSΨ=0.35) 0.2 million times or more
DC 24V/1A, DC 100V/0.1A(L/R=7ms) 0.2 million times or more
Voltage DC 24V±10%(ripple voltage 4 Vp-p or less)
External
Power Supply Current 170mA(TYP. DC 24V contact ON)
OFF→ON 10ms or less
Response
Time ON→OFF 12ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 220mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON
External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector(M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.55 kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

External load

Inside Circuit

Terminal No

5-25
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(3) 16-point Transistor Output Module Specifications


Config. Name Transistor Output Module
Spec. G3Q−TR2A
Output Point 16-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
Rated Open/Close Voltage DC 12/24V
Operating Open/Close Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V
Max. Load Current 2A/1-point, 5A/1COM
Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA or less
Max. Rush Current 4A 100ms or less/8A 10ms or less
Max. Voltage Drop in ON DC 1.5V (2A)
Surge Killer Clamp Diode
External Power Voltage DC 24V±10%(Ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less)
Supply Current 100mA (TYP, all points ON)
OFF→ON 2 ms or less
Response Time
ON→OFF 2 ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 120mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON
External Connection Method 20-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.54kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

External Load

Inside Circuit

External Load

Terminal
No

5-26
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(4) 32-point Transistor Output Module(Sink Type) Specifications


Config. Name Transistor Output Module
Spec. G3Q−TR4A
Output Point 32-point
Insulation Method Photo Coupler Insulation
Rated Load Voltage DC 12/24V
Operating Load Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V
Max. Load Current 0.5A/1-point, 3A/1COM
Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA or less
Max. Rush Current 4A 100ms or less/8A 10ms or less
Max. Voltage Drop in ON DC 1.5V (2A)
Surge Killer Clamp Diode
Voltage DC 24V±10%(Ripple Voltage 4Vp-p or less)
External Power
Supply Current 150mA (TYP. Contact ON)
OFF→ON 2ms or less
Response
Time ON→OFF 2ms or less
Common Method 16-point/1 COM
Inside Consumption Current 220mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON
External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 Screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.5kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

External Load

Inside
Circuit

External Load

Terminal No

5-27
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(5) 32-point Transistor Output Module(Source Type) Specifications


Config. Name Transistor Output Module
Spec. G3Q−TR4B
Output Point 32-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler Insulation
Rated Load Voltage DC 12/24V
Operating Load Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V
Max. Load Current 0.5A/1-point, 3A/1COM
Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA or less
Max. Rush Current 4A 100ms or less/8A 10ms or less
Max. Voltage Drop in ON DC 1.5V (2A)
Surge Killer Varister
External Voltage DC 24V±10%(Ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less)
Power
Supply Current 150mA (TYP. All points On)
OFF→ON 2ms or less
Response
Time ON→OFF 2ms or less
Common Method 16-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 200mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON
External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.5kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

Terminal No

External
load

Inside
Circuit

Terminal No

5-28
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(6) 64-point Transistor Output Module(Sink Type) Specifications


Config. name Transistor Output Module
Spec. G3Q−TR8A G3Q−TR8A ( 2004.6 ~ )
Output Point 64-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler Insulation
Rated Load Voltage DC 12/24V
Operating Load Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V
Max. Load Current 0.1A/1-point, 2A/1COM
Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA or less
Max. Rush Current 0.5A 10ms or less 0.7A 10ms or less
Max. Voltage Drop in ON DC 1.0V or less / 0.1A DC 0.2V or less / 0.1A
Surge Killer Clamp Diode Zener Diode
Voltage DC 24V±10%(Ripple voltage 4Vp-p or less)
External Power
Supply 150mA or less 20mA or less
Current
(TYP. All points ON) (TYP. All points ON)
OFF→ON 2ms or less
Response Time
ON→OFF 2ms or less
Common Method 32-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 300mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON
External Connection Method 40 pin 2 connectors
Weight (Kg) 0.5kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

External
Load

Inside
Circuit

5-29
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(7) 64-point Transistor Output Module(Source Type) Specifications


Config. Name Transistor Output Module
Spec. G3Q−TR8B
Output Point 64-point
Insulation Method Photo Coupler Insulation
Rated Load Voltage DC 12/24V
Operating Load Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V
Max. Load Current 0.1A/1-point, 2A/1COM
Current Leakage in OFF 0.1mA or less
Max. Rush Current 0.4A 100ms or less
Max. Voltage Drop in ON DC 1.0V(TYP) 0.1A
Voltage DC 10.2~26.4V
External
Power Supply Current 100mA or less (per TYP. DC 24V 1 COM)
OFF→ON 2ms or less
Response
Time ON→OFF 2ms or less
Common Method 32-point/1COM (COM Pin : 19, 20, 39, 40)
Inside Consumption Current 280mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with output On
External Connection Method 40 pin 2 connectors
Weight (Kg) 0.42kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

Pin NO

Inside
Circuit

5-30
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(8) 16-point SSR Output Module Specifications


Config. Name SSR Output Module
Spec. G3Q−SS2A
Output Point 16-point
Insulation Method Photo Coupler Insulation
Rated Load Voltage AC 100~240V(50/60Hz)
Max. Load Voltage AC 264V
Max. Load Current 2A/1-point, 5A/1COM
Min. Load Current 20mA
Current Leakage in OFF 2.5mA (AC 220V 60 Hz)
Max. Rush Current 40A 10ms or less
Max. Voltage Drop in ON AC 1.5V or less (2A)
Surge Killer Varister (387~473V), C.R observer
OFF→ON 0.5Cycle + 1ms or less
Response
Time ON→OFF 0.5Cycle + 1ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 370mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with Output ON
External Connection Method 20-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.5kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

External Load

Inside External Load


Circui

(ZC:Zero Cross Circuit)

Terminal
No

5-31
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

(9) 32-point SSR Output Module Specifications


Config. Name SSR Output Module
Spec. G3Q−SS4A
Output Point 32-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
Rated Load Voltage AC 100~240V(50/60Hz)
Max. Load Voltage AC 264V
Max. Load Current 1A/1-point, 5A/1COM
Min. Load Current 20mA
Current Leakage in OFF 2mA (AC 220V 60Hz)
Max. Rush Current 25A 10ms or less
Max. Voltage Drop in ON AC 1.5V or less (2A)
Surge Killer Varister (387 ~ 473V), C.R observer
Response OFF→ON 0.5 Cycle + 1ms or less
Time ON→OFF 0.5 Cycle + 1ms or less
Common Method 8-point/1COM
Inside Consumption Current 690mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with output ON
External Connection Method 38-point Terminal Connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight (Kg) 0.6kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

External load

Inside External load


Circuit

(ZC:Zero Cross Circuit)

Terminal No

5-32
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.6.3 Interrupt Input Module Specifications


Config. Name Interrupt Input Module
Spec. G3F−INTA
Input Point 16-point
Insulation Method Photo coupler insulation
Rated Input Voltage DC 24V
Rated Input Current 10 mA
Input Impedance About 2.4kΩ
Operating Voltage DC 21.6~26.4V
Max. Simultaneous Input Point 100% simultaneous ON
ON Voltage/ON Current DC 15V or more/6.5mA or more
OFF Voltage/OFF Current DC 5V or less/2mA or less
OFF→ON 0.5ms or less
Response Time
ON→OFF 0.5ms or less
Ground Method 1-point/1COM
Signal Detecting Rising or Falling Edge(Dip Switch Setting in the unit of channel)
Inside Consumption Current 190mA
Operation Display LED illuminated with input ON
External Connection Method 38-point Terminal connector (M3 X 6 screw)
Weight(kg) 0.4kg

Circuit External
Configuration Connection
Diagram

Inside
Circuit

Terminal No

5-33
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.7 Interface Module Specifications

5.7.1 Remote Interface Module Specifications


Remote Interface Module is used when installing the extended base in Driver−>Receiver pairs.
Interface Module Specifications are as shown in the following table.

Type Remote Interface Module Spec. Remark


Signal Transmission
Differential Transmission Parallel Bus Method
Method
Max. Operating Range 100m (Sum of CH1, CH2) Form R4 to R8 in entire configuration
Driver Module GM2−FDIA Mountable up to 4.
Receiver Module GM2−FRIA, GM2-FRIC GM2-FRIC used in 12-slot base
Max. Extended Module 8 per GM2−FDIA module 8 mountable in one CH(Channel)
GM2−FDIA : 630mA
Consumption Current
GM2−FRIA : 670mA

5.7.2 Remote Interface Module Configuration

5.7.2.1 Entire Configuration

P C
W P I/O D
R U CH0
Extended Base #1 CH1 Extended Base #5

P P
W I/O R1 W I/O R5
R R

Extended Base #2 Extended Base #6

P P
W I/O R2 W I/O R6
R R

Extended Base #3 Extended Base #7

P P
W I/O R3 W I/O R7
R R
Extended Base #4 Extended Base #8

P P
W I/O R4 W I/O R8
R R

CPU : CPU Module /


I/O : I/O module, Special/Communication Module(Disable to mount at
Communication Module in Extended Base, Some Special Module
Dismountable)
D : Remote Driver Module
R0-F7 : Remoter Receiver Module

5-34
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.7.2.2 Remote Interface Driver Module

This provides each part name of GM2−FDIA module.

CH1 : Connector to mount extended cable.

CH1 Error LED : Indicates Extended Base Error connected to Ch1.

CH1 CH1 ON/OFF : Turns On/Off the extended base connected to CH1.

OPER LED : Indicates the operation of Driver Module.

FAIL LED : Indicates Mounting position error of Driver Module.

CH2 CH2 ON/OFF Switch: Turns On/Off the extended base connected to
Ch2.

CH2 에러 LED : Indicates Extended Base error connected to Ch2.

CH2 : Connector to mount extended cable

The channel without extended cable should be mounted with Termination Resistance Module with
On/Off switch set to Off.

5-35
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.7.2.3 Remote Interface Receiver Module

The following indicates each part name of GM2−FRIA, GM2-FRIC Module.

IN : Connects to CH1/2 of driver module or OUT of receiver module.

OPER Switch : Determines the operation of receiver module.

Base Number Setting Switch

END Switch : Final Extended Base Setting

OPER LED : Indicates the operation of receiver module

FAIL LED : Indicates if Receiver Module is normal.

OUT : Connected to IN of receiver module mounted at Lower Base.

If not installed with Extended Cable at OUT of Final Base, set END switch to Y and mount the
terminal resistance at OUT.
Base number can be set between 1 and 15.
If mounting to 12-slot base, base number is set to even number(See page. 3.3.1).

5-36
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.7.3 Termination Resistance


Remote Interface module transmits and receives the signal using Differential method(RS−485
Spec.).
In case of remote connection, termination resistance module should be mounted for higher reliability.

(1) Structure

(2) Mounting Position

CH0
P C
W P I/O D
R U

CH1

P P
W I/O R W I/O R
R R

P P
W I/O R W I/O R
R R

Mounting Mounting
Position Position

5.7.4 Cable Specifications


The following table describes extended cable specifications of this PLC.

Config. Name G2C−E031 G3C−E061 G2C−E121 G2C−E401 G2C−E□□□


Length (m) 0.3 0.6 1.2 4.0 Customized
y Connection between Interface Driver Module and Receiver Module
Usage
y Connection between Interface Receiver Module and Receiver Module

For Cable type, see catalogue.

5-37
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

5.7.5 How to install Remoter Interface Module


1) How to Install
(1) Mount GM2-FDIA at basic base and GM2-FRIC at extended base.
(2) Connect the cable between GM2-FDIA and GM2-FRIC and between GM2-FRIC and GM2-
FRIC.
(3) Set On/Off switch of CH1 and CH2 in GM2-FDIA.
(4) Set OPER, RACK#, and END switches of GM2-FRIC.
(5) Install Termination Resistance at the connector of GM2-FRIC with END switch and unused
channel connector of GM2-FDIA.
(6) Power Input
(7) Check the operation using LED.
y Driver Module
− Checks FAIL LED of GM2-FDIA turns off.
− Checks OPER LED of GM2-FDIA turns on.
− Checks ERROR LED of CH1 and CH2 in GM2-FDIA CH1 turns off.
y Receiver Module
− Checks FAIL LED of GM2-FRIC turns off.
− Checks OPER LED of GM2-FRIC turns on.

Redundant Basic Base

P F F F F P
o D D D D o GM2-FDIA : CH1 Off, CH2 On
w I I I I w
er A A A A er GM2-FDIA : CH1 On, CH2 On

R3, R6, R9 : END ‘Y’

Extended Base 1 Extended Base 4 Extended Base 7


R1 R4 R7

Extended Base 2 Extended Base 5 Extended Base 8


R2 R5 R8

Extended Base 3 Extended Base 6 Extended Base 9


R3 R6 R9

5-38
Chapter 5. Product Specifications

2) Error Check

„ When FAIL LED illuminated


y For GM2-FDIA
− If GM2-FDIA mounted in wrong position, turns off the power and correct the position.
− If no error in position, replace the module or ask AS.
y For GM2-FRIC
− If GM2-FRIC mounted in wrong position, turns off the power and correct the position.
− Check that the extended base is installed with GM2-NRIA.
− If no error as shown in the above, replace the module or ask AS.

„ When OPER LED not illuminated


y For GM2-FDIA
− If GM2-FDIA mounted in wrong position, turns off the power and correct the position.
− Check CPU Module installed properly.
− If no error as shown in the above, replace the module or ask AS.
y For GM2-FRIC
− If GM2-FRIC mounted in wrong position, turns off the power and correct the position.
− Check POWER LED.
− Check that OPER set to “Y”.
− Check CH ON/OFF switch of GM2-FDIA set to ON.
− Check cable installed properly.
− Check CPU installed properly.
− In Switched I/O configuration, it is normal that OPER LED of the module connected to Master
illuminated and that connected to Stand-by not illuminated.
− If no error as shown in the above, replace the module or ask AS.

„ When ERROR LED of GM2-FDIA Illuminated


y Check that CH ON/OFF switch set correctly.
− Turns ON the channel connecting with GM2-FRIC and turns OFF if not.
y Check OPER and END switches of GM2-FRIC set properly.
− Check END switch of GM2-FRIC mounted in the bottom base set properly.
y Check cable for connection.
− Connect between OUT of GM2-FDIA and In of GM2-FRIC and between OUT of GM2-FRIC
and IN of GM2-FRIC.
y Check extended base for power supply.
− Check LED of power module illuminated.
y Check any one of two power modules in Switched I/O base(redundant power base)) for abnormal.
− Check LED of Power Module illuminated(FAIL LED of GM2-FRIC in the base attached with
abnormal power turns off but CH ERROR LED of GM2-FDIA connected with the desired GM2-
FRIC turns on).

5-39
Chapter 6. Operation Mode

Chapter 6. Operation Mode


6.1 Types of Operation Mode

There are program run modes of each CPU module and operation mode of redundant system in
Operation Mode.
(1) Program Run Mode
With program process of each CPU module, there are RUN, STOP and DEBUG. Each mode
operation can be varied in accordance with Redundant Operation.
(2) Redundant System Operation Mode
With Redundant system operation, there are redundant operation, stand-alone operation, master
operation, and stand-by operation.

6.2 Program Run Mode

6.2.1 RUN Mode


It means the mode that runs program operation normally.

Start the first scan in


If being in RUN mode when power
applied
Mode Start

If changed from STOP to RUN mode


Data Area Initialization in accordance Data Area Initialization according
with restart mode to the restart mode set

Check program for valid and determine


if able to run

Run Input refresh

Run scan program


Run task program

Inspect the mounted module for


normal operation and loose

Communication service and other


i id i

Run output refresh

Do you change mode?


Hold Run Mode
Change into other mode

Change operation mode

6-1
Chapter 6. Operation Mode

(1) When mode changed


From the first scan, initialization of data area will be run.
y When power applied in RUN mode, varied according to restart mode(Cold, Warm, Hot)
y When mode changed from STOP to RUN, varied according to restart mode (Cold, Warm)
y Checks the program for valid and determines it is able to run.
(2) Repetitive operation
Runs Input/Output refresh and scan program operation.
y Senses the movement condition of task program and runs task program.
y Checks mounted module for normal operation and loose.
y Performs communication service and operation mode change inspection.

6.2.2 STOP Mode


It means the mode that stops operation without program operation. Only in remote stop mode,
program can be transmitted through GMWIN.
„ When mode changed
y Deletes output image and runs output refresh.
„ Repetitive operation
y Runs Input/Output refresh.
y Checks mounted module for normal operation and loose.
y Performs communication service and operation mode change inspection.

6.2.3 DEBUG Mode


It means the mode to detect program error and track operation process. Only in STOP mode,
changeover into this mode is enabled. Checks the program operation and contents of each data and
verifies the program.

(1) When mode changed


y Initializes data area according to restart mode of parameter setting when initial mode changed.
y Deletes output image and runs output refresh.
(2) Repetitive Operation
y Runs Input refresh.
y Runs Debug operation according to setting.
y Runs Debug operation to the last program and then runs output refresh.
y Checks mounted module for normal operation and loose.
y Performs communication service and operation mode change inspection.
(3) Debug Operation Conditions
The following 4 debug operation conditions can be designated simultaneously.

Operation Description
Operation Condition
(If operation instruction done, the operation will stops after one
(Per one operation)
performed)
According to Break If Break Point designated in program, stops at the designated point. Up
Point designation to 32 break points can be designated.

If contact area to be monitored and the status(Read, Write, Value) to be


According to Contact stopped designated, stops when designated operation occurred at
setting contact.

According to scan If scan frequency to be operated designated, operates and then stops
frequency designation after operating as designated.

(4) Operation Method


Debug Operation Control(For detailed, see GMWIN User’s Manual).
y Set Debug mode in GMWIN and then runs operation.
y Task program is able to set operation(Enable/Disable) in the unit of each task.

6-2
Chapter 6. Operation Mode

Remarks

Debug mode is enabled only in stand-alone CPU operation.

6.2.4 How to Change Program Operation Mode


How to change program operation mode
(1) Using Mode key of CPU Module and DIF Module
(2) By connecting GMWIN to communication port of CPU Module and DIF Module.
(3) Through GMWIN network connected to other station.
(4) By user’s command using FAM, computer communication module, and etc.
(5) By ‘STOP Function’ during program operation.

6.2.4.1 Program Run Mode Change Using Mode Key


The following table describes how to change operation mode using mode key.

Mode Key Position Operation Mode


RUN Local RUN
STOP Local STOP
STOP → REM Remote STOP
REM → RUN * Local RUN
RUN → REM Remote RUN
REM → STOP Local STOP
* When changed from Remote RUN to Local RUN, PLC continues to operate.

6.2.4.2 Remote Operation Mode Change


Remote Mode change is enabled only in remote mode with mode key position set to REM.
Mode Key Using FAM, computer
Mode Change By GMWIN
Position communication, and etc.
Remote STOP → Remote RUN O O
Remote STOP → DEBUG O X
Remote RUN → Remote
O O
REM STOP
Remote RUN → DEBUG X X
DEBUG → Remote STOP O O
DEBUG → Remote RUN X X

6.2.4.3 Remote Operation Mode Change Permission


Operation Mode change by other equipments can be prevented for system protection. This time,
operation mode can only be changed using Mode Key and GMWIN. Set ‘PLC Control Permission by
communication’ in Basic Parameter (See 12.1 Basic Parameter).

6-3
Chapter 6. Operation Mode

6.3 Redundant System Operation Mode


6.3.1 Redundant Operation Mode
There are key switches for CPU operation mode setting and redundant operation mode setting in
Redundant System.

CPU-A DIF CPU-B


REM A+B REM
RUN STOP A B RUN STOP

Operation of Redundant system is classified as follows according to installation, power, DIF key and
operation mode of respective CPU.
CPU-A(B) CPU-B(A)
Current Operation Operation
Mode Description
Operation Mode Mode
Stand- Only CPU-A or B is operated equally with stand-alone
RUN STOP
alone CUP while running in Redundant Operation Mode.
Redundant
Redundant CPU-A and CPU-B runs redundant operation as
Operation Mode RUN RUN
Operation master and stand-by in Redundant Operation Mode.
(Key: A+B)
CPU-A and CPU-B is set to master and stand-by but
Stop STOP STOP
operation stops in Redundant Operation Mode.
In
1. Only CPU selected from CPU A or B is operated
Stand-alone Operation
equally with stand-alone CPU.
CPU Mode mode of -
2.The operation without designated will be STOP
(Key:A or B) stand-
mode.
alone CPU
* Power off in redundant operation is treated as STOP.

6.3.2 Redundant Operation Mode Change


(1) Redundant System operation can be changed according to changed CUP operation mode using
Key or GMWIN.

Segment DIF Key Change into Change into


Description
Current State setting Master Stand-by
(Not changed
-> STOP With master SOP, operation stops.
Stand-alone :STOP)
A+B
(RUN/STOP) (Not changed With Stand-by changed into RUN mode,
-> RUN
:RUN) changes to Redundant operation.
With Master STOP, stand-by takes over
(Not changed
-> STOP operation and becomes stand-alone
Redundant :RUN)
A+B operation.
(RUN/RUN)
(Not changed With Stand-by STOP, master becomes
-> STOP
:RUN) stand-alone operation.
First input RUN mode(A or B) starts
Stop (Not changed
A+B -> RUN operation and becomes stand-alone
(STOP/STOP) :STOP)
operation.

6-4
Chapter 6. Operation Mode

(2) In redundant operation mode, operation or master can be changed using DIF key or GMWIN as
follows.
Current Operation DIF Key status Operation Control and Operation
Redundant operation as
A+B DIF Key: A+B -> B B Stand-alone operation
A Master
Redundant operation as B
Stand-alone operation B DIF Key: B -> A+B
Master
Redundant operation as
A+B DIF Key: A+B -> A A stand-alone operation
B Master
Redundant operation as A
A stand-alone operation A DIF Key: A -> A+B
Master

Redundant operation as GMWIN: master Redundant operation as B


A+B
A Master changeover instruction *1 Master
*1 Control after connecting with CPU to be operated as master(CPU-B in the example)

6.3.3 Master Changeover during Redundant Operation


1) If operation disabled due to a failure of mater during redundant operation, master stops operation
and stand-by continues operation as master. Master auto changeover during operation can be done
as follows.
(1) When power off of master
(2) When master stopped due to wrong operation of program
(3) When program operation mode of master changed to STOP
(4) When DIF key set to stand-alone mode of operating CPU
(5) When changeover base or its module not accessed from master normally
A) Previous master not doesn’t stop operation and continues operation.
B) If the same failure occurred in changed master, entire system stops operation.
C) If module error mask flag set, the operation is the same with in A), but continues operation
without change of master in B).
(6) When a failure occurred in Redundant Base connected to master
A) A power failure
B) Base of Module Failure
C) Contacts error designated as triplex input
D) Output feedback data error
(7) When communication or interface module error occurred in Basic Interface
(When a failure occurred in network line not communication module, master changeover is
disabled.)

2) During redundant operation, master auto changeover is disabled in the following conditions. This
time, warning message will be displayed.
(1) When an error occurred in any redundant power of switched base
(2) If stand-by error occurred in a failure of master
A) Operation stops if the same error detected.
B) In case of the above A), if mask flag set on the desired error, continues operation without
master changeover.
C) If master and stand-by not having the same failure e.g. cause of failure not redundant,
continues operation without master changeover (Ex. If a failure detected at another position
among triplex input).
3) When normal redundant operation disabled due to a failure of DIF module, master is changed
into stand-alone operation and stand-by stops operation.

6-5
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7.1 Program Running Structure

• Program is written by GMWIN, and then compiled and run by transmitting to PCL after converting active
file compiling the program and converted to active file.

• Program consists of Scan and Task Program. Scan Program is operated repetitively per scan and Task
Program is operated by task.

• Scan Program is operated and then stopped from the start to the end in accordance with registered order
in project. This total process is called “1 scan”.

• After operating the Program from the start to the end as mentioned above, running the Program
repetitively with the same process is “Repetitive operation system”.

• Reading and storing the status of input module in the input image area before computing Scan Program
and detecting the contents of the output image area after computing Scan Program is called I/O Refresh.

• GLOFA PLC series is Repetitive operation system and do not input and output directly the status of I/O
during operation, and just operated by running I/O refresh. In this case, the status of each I/O contact is
stored at the memory area in PLC. This area is called I/O image area.

Operation Start

Input module contact status


Input image area refresh
Input image area refresh

Scan Program Start


. Run Task Program
.
.
End of Scan Program

1 scan

Output image area refresh Output module contact


Output image area refresh

:System self diagnosis, Communication


END
Operation mode changing check, etc

7-1
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7.2 Program Operation

7.2.1 Program Types


Each Program of GLOFA PLC is generated using operator, function and function block that consist of
Programs and divided into the followings per operating condition of Program.

1) Initial Program
• Initial Program for cold or warm restart: operated by _INIT Task
• Initial Program for hot restart: operated by _H_INIT Task
2) Task Program
• Positive period Task Program: Max. 32 EA
• Outside Contact Task Program: Max. 16 EA
• Inside Contact Task Program: Max. 16 EA
3) Scan Program
• Max. 180 EA: 180 minus the Number of assigned Task Program are available.
4) Error Program
• Error Task Program : Operated by _ERR_SYS Task

7.2.2 How to Run Program


1) Initialization Program
Refer to “7.3 Restart Mode” regarding each restart mode.

• It is used to initiate system such as special module as initial program (_INIT Task) when operating cold
or worm restart mode.
Initial program performs repetitive operation until satisfying setting condition (until INITDONE flag is on
at initial program). In this case, operate I/O Refresh.
• When operating on Hot Restart mode, the purpose of Initial Program is to start from stopped step when
power failure occurred. Initial Program is used to need special module to restore to condition before
power failure or outside condition to make for normal operation.
This initial program performs repetitive operation until setting condition satisfied with (until INITDONE
flag is on at initial program); do not operate Output Refresh during operating Hot Restart Initial
Program
Use ‘DIREC_O’ function as output refresh is needed at Hot Restart Initial Program.
After completing Hot Restart Initial Program, run Scan Program from previous stopped step and
complete Scan Program that was stopped. In this case, do not operate Output Refresh and operate
normal I/O Refresh from the next Scan.
• During initial program, system operating status flag_INIT_RUN turns ON.

2) Task Program
• Program assigned by Positive period Task operates program at time interval set in task.
• Program assigned by Outside interrupt task operates program by Outside interrupt contact signal
occurred from interrupt module.
• Program assigned by inside contact task operates program when rising edge of inside contact
occurred.

7-2
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

3) Scan Program
Program that is not assigned as Initial Program and Task Program among programs written by user
becomes Scan Program automatically. Scan Program is running repetitively regardless of task and the
priority is the lowest. And Scan Program is running sequential repetitive operation in accordance with
registered order on GMWIN screen.

4) Error Program
It is error task program used when system error occurred during operating a user program. User
operates program under _ERR_SYS task condition after writing a program against system error. It is
possible to protect stopping of system operating with controlling System Error Mask Flag at Error Task
Program (see “9.4 Error Remedy”).

7.2.3 Program Flow Chart


Scan Program operates sequentially from start to end per written orders. This kind of Scan Program
operates as repetitive operation system and the process is “1 scan”.
Temporarily stop the Program that is currently operating and operate related Task Program when the
active condition of Positive period Task or Outside Contact Task Program occurred during program
operating.
After operating program, check the active condition of inside contact task program and operate Task
Program occurred active condition.

Operation Start

*1
Initialization _INIT,_H_INIT:Initial Task
Operated when user writes
Initial Program

Input Refresh Processing

Scan Program Processing

1 Scan Process immediately under


Inside Contact Task Program occurring ‘Regular Cycle Task
Program’ condition

Ouput Refresh Processing

_ERR_SYS:Error Task
Operated when errors occurred
*2 and program written by user
Self Diagnosis

*1 Verify whether normal operation is available or not after checking structure information of system,
module,
condition of program and memory module.
*2 Verify whether normal operation is still available or not after checking changed structure condition,
abnormal operating of module and program.

7-3
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7.2.4 Synchronization method during redundant operation

7.2.4.1 Synchronization
Synchronize data and operation point between CPU modules when running like below during redundant
operation.
(1) Scan Input (Image Area)
(2) Scan Output (Image Area)
(3) Immediate Input (Command)
(4) Immediate Output (Command)
(5) When starting Program Scan
(6) When starting Task
(7) When processing communication
(8) When processing GMWIN communication
(9) When running function block for special module
(10) When changing time data inside CPU

7.2.4.2 Synchronization Method


The followings are operation details of synchronization during redundant operating.

1) Input Scan (Image Area)


• Switched I/O : Master reads and transmit to standby
• Redundant I/O : Operating by value that is equaled two of them when three-input
• One-sided I/O : CPU-A reads input data and transfer to CUP-B

2) Scan output (Image Area)


• Compare output area data of master and standby before output
• Output master value unless the master does coincide.
• Restart standby and coincide with master status when un-coincident.

3) Immediate Input (Command)


The same method as Scan Input (only, selected input)

4) Immediate output (Command)


The same method as Scan output (only, selected input)

5) When starting Program Scan


Synchronize Scan start point after Scan END processing and Scan ready

6) When starting Task


(1) Make kind of Task, intercepted position and start point matched with.
- Scan Task, Positive period Task and Inside Contact Task.

(2) Synchronization Method


• Operate Task of upper priority using program block unit
(if several program block is operated by task currently running, process the upper task that is
waiting before operating each program block)
• if program block is large, process the task of the upper priority during program block by ‘standby
task process function’ of user.

7-4
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7) When processing communication


HS communication synchronizes at Scan END and variable communication service is synchronized by
function block.

8) When processing GMWIN communication


• Starts communication after assigning CPU to be contacted
• Assigned CPU responses singly against communication of GMWIN because status of master and
standby of data that is using at operation are equal. If modifying inside data as the communication
result of GMWIN and line opened master CPU, data of standby is modified together. (It is possible to
monitor detailed operation information of standby after contacting from GMWIN to standby)
• Contact is available only through connector of DIF during redundant operating.

9) When running function block for special module


Both of switched and redundant I/O performs data synchronization immediately.

10) Synchronization of time data in CPU


• Two CPUs change base time together such as increased time change in CPU.
• Perform synchronization of time rate after matching with two CPUs to remove errors. The base
becomes value of master and time running data is used to monitor master. (Set standby value to value
of master – to remove cumulative error by long operation)

7-5
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7.3 Restart Mode

Restart Mode is to set whether to operate RUN Mode after initialization parameters and system when
stating to operate RUN Mode by returning Mode or re-power on. It consists of Cold, Worm and Hot. The
followings are operating condition of each re-start Mode (See “12.1 Basic Parameter” for setting method).
7.3.1 Cold restart
• It is performed when restart mode is set to Cold Restart at parameter.
• Eliminate all data to “o” and set only parameter which initial value is set to initial value.
• Though Worm Re-start Mode is set at parameter, operated by Cold Re-start Mode when initial running
after program to be run changed.
• If pressing manual reset switch more than 5 sec during operating, operated by Cold Restart Mode
regardless of setting Re-start Mode
7.3.2 Warm restart
• It is performed when restart mode is set to Warm Restart at parameter.
• Maintain previous value of data that is set to maintain previous value and the data that is set only initial
value is set to initial value. Except this, eliminate all data to “0”
• Though Worm Re-start Mode is set at parameter, operated by Cold Re-start Mode when initial running
after program changed.
• Though Worm Re-start Mode is set at parameter, operated by Cold Re-start Mode if data is abnormal.
• If pressing manual reset switch within 5 sec during operating when Worm Re-start Mode is set at
parameter, operated by Worm Re-start Mode.
7.3.3 Hot restart
• It is a run mode when re-power on after power off during normal operation (in RUN Mode). It is operated
on Hot Restart Mode when the time is within Hot Restart allowance setting time until re-power on after
power off.
• All data and program running factor is restored to the status of before power-off. Program is maintained
as
sudden power failure because the program runs at the status before power-off.
• Operating on Restart Mode set at parameter when excess Hot Restart allowance setting time
• If data contents are abnormal, operating on Cold Restart Mode.

Remarks

• Consider the followings when setting Hot Restart allowance time


System operates Hot Restart Program when time that is calculated from AC Fail to system checking
completed is within setting time. If power failure occurs again before completing program operation, try
again the Hot Restart Program and calculate the time form first power failure.
When a power failure occurred for more than 20ms, it takes proximately 0.5 sec until operating normally
after re-power on. Hot Restart allowance time setting is set by sec.

• Above mode is adapted when master CPU operates in shutdown. Standby is not adapted on Restart mode
due to operating under currently operating master condition

• Consider followings when controlling manual reset switch during redundant operating.
Total system is operating when controlling reset switch of CPU operated by master switch but only standby
CPU is operating when controlling reset switch of standby CPU.

7-6
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

Power on

STOP
Operation STOP Mode Operation

RUN

Abnorma
Power Failure holding data ?

Normal

Hot RestartTime?
Time? Excess
Hot Restart

Power On
Power
withinon
setwithin
time the
specified time
Cold Restart
Basic Parameter Setting
Restart mode?

Warm Restart

Run Hot Restart Run Cold Restart


Run Warm Restart

RUN Mode Operation

(Flow chart of restart mode in power on during operation)

7.3.4 Data Initialization according to Restart Mode


• Default parameter means what initial value or previous value maintain is not set,
• INIT parameter is what initial value is set,
• Retain parameter is what previous value maintain is set, the followings are initialization method in
accordance with each kinds of restart mode.

Mode
COLD WARM HOT
Parameter
Maintain previous
Default Initialize to “0” Initialize to “0”
value
Maintain previous
Retain Initialize to “0” Maintain previous value
value
Initialize to user assigned Maintain previous
Initialization Initialize to user assigned value
value value
Retain & Initialize to user assigned Maintain previous
Maintain previous value
Initialization value value

7-7
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7.3.5 Restart Mode Application according to Operation Purpose


• Cold Restart:
It is used when starting operation after a completion of initialization in whole control system.

• Warm Restart:
Several (parts) processes Initialized and then operated but it is used when restarting operation under
remembering previous operation result of control system

• Hot Restart:
It is used when starting operation under remembering to several (parts) processes in previous operating
status of total control system. Processing status control of parts processed is used to system that is
remembered and controlled by inside memory not Outside signal.

7.3.6 Operation Type in each Restart Mode


Check the below for operation stopping and restarting of PCL during operating.

1) Scope
GLOFA GM series PLC become stop status after retaining operation data if operation is not available
any more due to shut down during operating. And it can operate continuously because previous
operation status can be restored. But changing of occurred Outside controller can’t be known under
PCL shut down and also requirements that are occurred before stopping are processed following restart.

2) Cold Restart
CPU operates like below when Cold Restart.
(1) Delete all previous operation data and initialize parameter.
(2) Perform initialization program. In this case run I/O refresh.
(3) Start normal scan program.

3) Warm Restart
CPU operates like below when Warm Restart.
(1) Complete scan program and task program that are shut down.
Do not process FB of special/communication module and operate with previous data.
(2) Ignore task and communication service on standby.
(3) Perform only input refresh and high-speed link input.
(4) Initialize the parameter.
(5) Perform initialization program. In this case run I/O refresh.
(6) Start normal scan program.

4) Hot Restart
CPU operates like below when Hot Restart.
(1) Complete scan program and task program that are shut down.
Do not process function block of special/communication module and operate with previous data.
(2) Perform the task on standby and ignore communication on standby.
(3) Perform only input refresh and high-speed link input.
(4) Initialize the parameter.

7-8
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

(5) Perform Hot initialization program at this time perform only input refresh. If output refresh is
necessary, use ‘DIREC_O” function.
(6) Start normal scan program.

Remarks

y Retain forced ON/OFF data, I/O skip data, failure mask setting data and failure history information when
restart. If necessary, delete them with GMWIN.

y Task that was shut down or on standby is processed when Warm and Hot restart. Result of performance
is output by scan refresh. Therefore process result can be output by input data before power failure.

y Positive period task is calculated by adding times which were measured before system shot down (Except
time during system shut down at calculating time

7-9
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7.4 Task Program

This section provides kind of user definition task and method of task program usage. See “7.2.1 Kind of
task”, “7.2.2 Operation Type of Program” for initialization and error task.

7.4.1 Kind of Task


Below table provides characters of Task.

Kind Positive period Task Outside Contact Task Inside Contact Task
Spec (Interval Task) (Interrupt Task) (Single Task)

Number 32 EA 16 EA 16 EA
Positive period Task (Cycle
Rising or falling edge of Rising edge of Bool
Operation setting is available until max.
input contact of interrupt parameter data among
condition 4294967.29 sec by 10ms
module inside memory data (0->1)
unit)
Perform immediately when Perform with searching edge
Output and Perform periodically per
an error occurred at interrupt after completing scan
Operation setting time
module contact program operation
Delay max. 5ms + Delay
Output delay Delay as much as max.
Delay max. 5ms interrupt module (within
time scan time
0.5ms)
0~7 level setting 0~7 level setting 0~7 level setting
Performance
(the order of priority of 0 level (the order of priority of 0 (the order of priority of 0
priority
is first) level is first) level is first)

User assign to not overlap User assign to not overlap User assign to not overlap
Task Num.
among 0~31 among 32~47 among 48~63

7.4.2 Processing of Task Program


This section provides common processing method and Remarks pertaining to Task Program Process.

7.4.2.1 Characteristics of Task Program


Task Program doesn’t repeat process for every scan like scan program and run when operation
condition occurred. Consider this when making task program.

For instance if using timer and counter at Positive period Task Program of 10 sec cycle, error of this timer
can be max 10 sec. Changed input within 10 sec is not counted because the counter checks the input
status of the counter per 10 sec.

7.4.2.2. Performance of Task


Makes new occurred task not interrupt during operating of program block at redundant system.
Processes high priority task program among standby task at end point of program block that is running

7-10
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

• Ends running task and performs standby task during operating task program.
• Performs with checking standby task whenever each program block ends during operating scan
program

1) Performance delay of standby task during operating scan program


Correct control can not be expected by task program if running time of scan program is longer than
running delay allowance time of task required at control system. Use the following method to reduce
standby time of task.

• Divide Scan Program in to several program blocks by function.


• If program cannot be divided, insert “standby task processing function (SYNC)” by proper interval in
program and perform task that is waiting. Total scan time increases due to SYNC function running
so Insert necessary minimum quantity
• Total scan time increases as much as task program running time in one scan. Therefore in case of
positive period task, setting short cycle more than necessary is not allowed.

2) Standby task running delay during task program running


Consider relation between tasks because of running standby task after finishing task on operation during
task program running.
• Configure the task program short to reduce other task standby time. Before running standby task,
ignore the last occurred task if the same task is required
• Determine priority of task per emergency of response by considering in case of various task running
simultaneously required.

7.4.2.3 System operation and performance of task when instantaneous power failure
• User definition task doesn’t operate during initialization task program running.
• When instantaneous power failure occurred within 20ms, after recovering power failure, perform a task
that was waiting before power failure and a task that was occurred during power failure. Task that was
occurred redundantly can be ignored.
• In case of re-operation by Hot Restart, task that performed before power failure and standby task can be
processed but interrupt task that was occurred during power failure or positive period task that was
occurred redundantly during power failure will be ignored.
• Ignore all tasks, which were occurred during power failure and standby task when re-running with cold or
warm restart.

7.4.3 Processing of Positive period Task Program


This section provides processing of task program if operation condition of task program is set by positive
period

1) Setting item at task


Set running cycle of task that can be operation condition of running task program and priority.

2) Positive period Task Processing


Perform positive period task process per setting time interval (performance cycle).

3) Precautions When using positive period task program


• When positive period task program is currently running or waiting, if performance requirements of the
same task program are occurred, new occurred task is ignored and task crush warning typical flag
(_TASK_ERR) is reset. And related location of system error detail flag (TC_BMAP[n]) is marked and
issued number of positive period task that performance requirement was ignored at related location of
(_TC_CNT[n]) is recorded.

7-11
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

Remarks

• When setting running cycle of positive period task program, consider that performance requirements of
various positive period task programs can be occurred simultaneously.
If using 4 positive period task programs that each cycle is 2, 4, 10 and 20 sec. There can be some
problems such as scan time can extend momentary cause 4 performance requirements are occurred per
20 sec.

7.4.4 Processing of Outside Contact Task Program


This section provides process method of task program in assigning the running condition of task program
to Outside interrupt contact signal that is input at interrupt module.

1) Setting items at interrupt module


Set the rising and down edge to interrupt module by Dip switch in accordance with required condition of
each contact.

2) Setting items at Task


Set contact number and priority of interrupt module to task that is identical the operating condition of
running task program
Task number assigned automatically to manage task.

Module contact
0 1 2 3 ... 12 13 14 15
number
Task number 32 33 34 35 ... 44 45 46 47

3) Outside contact task process


When interrupt at interrupt module occurred by signal authorized from Outside, CPU module recognize
this signal and task program that operated by contact occurred signal is performed.

4) Precautions when using Outside contact task program


• When task program that is operated by contact of interrupt module is running or standing by, if
performance requirement of task program is occurred by the same contact, new occurred task will be
ignored and Outside contact task that is occurred running requirement congestion and occurred number
are recorded at task crush warning typical flag (_TASK_ERR) and system error detail flag
(TC_BMAP[n]).
• Running requirement of task program can be accepted if operation mode is RUN mode. Running
requirement occurred during operating on STOP mode is ignored totally.

7.4.5 Processing of Inside Contact Task Program


This section provides process method of task program if setting operation condition of task program to
contact of direct parameter (I, Q, M) or auto parameter.

1) Setting items at task


Set contact and priority that can be operation condition of performing task program. Confirm the task
number for task management.
2) Inside contact point task process
Check the status of the contacts that can be operation condition of inside contact task program and then
perform the inside contact task programs occurred rising edge per priority after finishing performance of
scan program at CPU module.

3) Precautions when using inside contact task program

7-12
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

• Inside contact task program is performed after completing performance of scan program. Although
performance condition of inside contact task program is occurred at scan program or task program
(positive period, Outside contact), it is not performed immediately but performed after completing
performance of scan program.

• Inside contact task checks at the completed performance point of scan program. Therefore if inside
contact task performance condition is occurred and disappeared(if doing OFF→ON→OFF assigned
contact) by scan program or task program (positive period, Outside contact) during “1 scan”, task
doesn’t perform cause performance condition is not detected at performance condition checking point.

7.4.6 Verification of Task Program


Verify below significant items after making task program.

(1) Is the setting of the task proper?


Scan time will become longer or irregular if task occurs more than necessary or various tasks within one
scan occur simultaneously. If task setting cannot be changed, check the setting value of the watchdog
time with consideration of scan time that is possible to occur.

(2) Is the task priority well arranged?


Check the case of task required simultaneously and then recheck task priority with it.

(3) Do you make the task program short?


If the performance time of the task program is long, it causes that scan time becomes longer or irregular
or crush of task program can be occurred. Make the performance time short if it is possible.

(4) Is there any effective to other program due to performance result of task?
If scan program and task program share input image, direct parameter (%M) and global parameter,
check that the process results of the task programs effect scan program. It has to be paid more
attention, if using “standby task process function” or spiriting scan program.

Refer to “Example of Scan Time Calculation” of “7.8 Scan Time” for process speed of scan program and
task program.

7-13
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7.4.7 Example of Program Configuration and Processing


Register task and program as shown in the following,
• Task Register : T_SLOW ( Interval := T#30ms, Priority := 2 )
PROC_1 ( Single := %MX0, Priority := 3 )
E_INT1 ( Interrupt:= 0, Priority := 1 )
• Program Registration : Program --> S0, S1, S2, S3,….., S9 (Scan)
Program → P1 with task T_SLOW
Program → P2 with task PROC_1
Program → P3 with task E_INT1

If the performance time of program is the same as the occurrence time of Outside interrupt,
• Performance time of each program : S0,…,S9 = approximately 6ms, P1 = 4ms, P2 = 7ms, P3 =
1ms
• Interrupt occurrence time of E_INT1: occurred at 22ms, 60ms, 94ms after operating
• Occurrence of PROC_1: occurred during scan program
the following is program performance.

Scan Start End scan End 1 scan


(Start initial operation) program (Start new scan)

S0 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 End S0 S1 S2
Perform P0

Perform P1

T_SLOW
occurred

Perform P2

PROC 1

Perform P3

E_INT1
occurred
Time : 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 [mS]

„ Performance Process by time


0 ~ 19 [ms] : Start scan and then perform scan program S0,S1,S2,…in order.
20~29 [ms] : occurred Outside interrupt at 22ms but perform P3 at 25ms after completing S3. 30~59 [ms] :
occurred Outside interrupt at 30ms but perform P1 after completing S4.
60~69 [ms] : occurred positive period and Outside interrupt simultaneously at 30ms but perform P3 and
then P1 per priority after completing S8 performance.
70~79 [ms] : search inside contact and then perform P2 at S9 ending point that is last program block
among scan program.
80~89 [ms] : Start process related system in accordance with scan end.
90~99 [ms] : stop contemporarily the end process per positive period interrupt requirement during system
process and perform P1. And process the requirement of P3 after P3 completed and then perform the end
process.
100~ [ms] : complete the lest of the end process and start new scan(106 ms )

7-14
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7.5 Timer/Counter

7.5.1 Timer
Timer of PLC is Addition Timer that increases current value per measuring time. There are ON Delay
Timer (TON), OFF Delay Timer (TOF), Pulse Timer (TP), etc.
Performance and output process of timer processed immediately when running a function block. Time
range can be measured from 0.001sec to 4294967.295sec (1193 hours) by 1ms unit.
Refer to “GLOFA PLC command book” for detail instruction.

NAME
TON

BOOL IN Q BOOL
TIME PT ET TIME

IN: Timer running condition


PT: Preset Time
Q : Output Contact
ET: Elapsed Value

7.5.1.1 ON Delay Timer


Expiration time renewal of timer is performed when running timer function block (TP) and the contact of
timer is ON as expiration time reaches at setting time (expiration time = setting time). Timing drawing of ON
Delay Timer is as follows.

IN
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5

Q
t0+PT t1 t4+PT t5

PT

ET
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5

7.5.1.2 OFF Delay Timer


Output Contact (Q) is ON as input condition is ON. When input condition is OFF, start Expiration time
renewal of timer. Expiration time renewal performs the timer function block and turn off the contact (Q) if
expiration time reaches setting time (expiration time = setting time). Timing drawing of OFF Delay Timer is
as follows.

7-15
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

IN
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5

Q
t0 t1+PT t2 t5+PT

PT

ET
t1 t3 t5

7.5.1.3 Pulse Timer


When input condition is ON, output contact (Q) is ON.
Timer when performing timer function block (TON) and the output contact of timer is OFF as expiration time
reaches at setting time (expiration time = setting time). Contact can be OFF after setting time expiration
though input condition is OFF. Timing drawing of ON Delay Timer is as follows.

IN
t0 t1 t2 t3 t4 t5

Q
t0 t0 +PT t2 t 2+ PT t4 t4 +P T

PT

ET
t0 t1 t2 t4 t5

7.5.1.4 Timer Error

Timer error means the time from max. ‘1 scan time + scan start to timer function block performance’

7-16
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

7.5.2 Counter
The Counter of PLC CPU detects rising edge (OFF→ON) of input signal and increases current value.
There are Counter Up (CTI), Counter Down (CTD), Counter Up/Down (CTUD), etc. for more details, see
“GLOFA PLC command book”.
(1) Count up Counter increases current value.
(2) Countdown Counter decreases current value.
(3) Count up/down counter compares count value of two input conditions.

7.5.2.1 Count up Counter


There must be Input Condition (CU), Reset Condition (R) and Setting Value (PV).

NAME

CTU
BOOL CU Q BOOL
BOOL R
INT PV CV INT

Turn the output contact of counter ON if Current Value (CV) increases and then become the same as
Setting Value (PV). When RESET signal input, current value become 0 and output contact (Q) become
OFF.

7.5.2.2 Countdown Counter


There must be Input Condition (CU), Road (LD) and Setting Value (PV).

NAME
CTD

BOOL CD Q BOOL
BOOL LD
INT PV CV INT

Turn the output contact (Q) of counter ON if Current Value (CV) decreases and then become 0. When
LD signal input, current value become setting value and output contact (Q) become OFF.

7.5.2.3 Count Up/Down Counter


There must be two Input Conditions, RESET Condition, LD Condition and Setting Value (PV).

NAME
CTUD

BOOL CU QU BOOL
BOOL CD QD BOOL
BOOL R
BOOL LD
INT PV CV INT
When RESET signal input, current value
become 0.
When LD signal input, current value become setting value.

7-17
Chapter 7. Basic Concept of Program

Current Value (CV) increases 1 at rising edge of CU and decreases 1 at rising edge of CD.
QU is ON if Current Value (CV) is more than Setting Value (PV) and QD is ON if Current Value (CV) is
less than or the same as 0.

7.5.2.4 Max Factor Speed of Counter


Max Factor Speed of Counter is determined by scan time and counter is available if each of ON time and
OFF time of input condition is more than scan time.

n 1 n : D uty (% )
M ax Factor Speed C m ax 100 X [tim es/s]
ts ts : Scan Tim e [s]

Duty n indicates ON and OFF time rates of input signal by %.

Remarks

ON
Pulse Input
OFF OFF
Of Counter
T1 T2

T1
When T1 ≤ T2 n= X 100 [%]
T1+T2
T2
When T1 > T2 n= X 100 [%]
T1 T2

7-18
Chapter 8. Program Operation

Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.1 System Operation

8.1.1 Program Preparation


(1) Program Preparation
Prepare the program using GMWIN.
(For detailed, see ‘GMWIN User’s Manual’.)

(2) Program Transmission


• Transmit program to PLC using GMWIN.
• Mount the memory module having operation program.

8.1.2 Operation Method


For PLC operation, there are the following methods.
(1) Using Local Key:
Download the program in REM mode and then set Front key to ‘RUN’.

(2) Using GMWIN:


Set Front Key to ‘REM’ and than select ‘RUN’ in ‘On-line Menu’.

(3) By Power Input:


Set Front Key to ‘REM’ and power on. If key set to ‘REM’ and previously Remote ‘RUN’ mode,
operation started immediately after power on.

(4) Restart using Reset Key:


There are ‘RESEt’ and ‘OVERALL RESET’.
• RESET: Press and release RESET switch in front of CPU module. ‘rESEt’ will be displayed in
front. Operates in the same operation with power ON/OFF.
• OVERALL RESET: If pressing RESET switch in front of CPU module more than 5 seconds,
‘rSt c’ will be displayed in front. If releasing switch, restarted with COLD RESTART.

8.1.3 Initial Operation


This describes system setting and operation for initial operation of redundant system.
(1) According to I/O usage, set Switched I/O, Redundant I/O and Stand-alone I/O.
(2) Prepare program block separately as shown in para. (1) if possible.
(3) Set base as shown in para. (1).(Set in the unit of base in Redundant Parameter)
Ex.) Base 0:Redundant, Base 1:Redundant Base 2:Switched, Base 3:Stand-alone
(4) Set I/O redundant circuit in redundant parameter.
(5) Complete configuration and then run compile.
(6) Download the program into A Side.
(7) With B Side stopped, run trial operation of A Side.

8-1
Chapter 8. Program Operation

(8) Set B Side at RUN and make it stand-by.


(9) Stop A Side and run back up trial of B Side.
(10) If necessary, save the program of each CPU at memory module.
(11) Start normal operation as follows.
• Start first the side to be operated as master referring to ‘6.3 Redundant System Operation
Mode’(this time, if Stnby displayed at CPU, restart using reset key) and after master started in
normal operation, start standby side and make it redundant operation.

8.1.4 Operation Participation

8.1.4.1 Operation Participation


It means the state that standby is participated in redundant operation during operation of master.
Standby is synchronized with master as follows.
(1) Initialization of CPU
(2) Check of Redundant Composition
(3) Transfer of invariable data from master
(4) Transfer of variable data from master
(5) Check of synchronization with master
(6) Participating in operation at the same time with master

Remarks

• (1),(2),(3) are processed in separately to do within delay time of about 50ms at each scan of master.
• (4),(5),(6) shall be processed within one scan of master and within delay time of max. 50 ms.
(If operating variable exceeds the standard, its delay time may be over 50ms. See 8.5.3 Delay Time in
Redundant Operation’.)

8.1.4.2 Standby Operation Participation Details


This describes the detailed operation when standby participated in .
(1) Power On
• Check during operation of master
• Standby Entry Mode
• CPU Self Diagnosis
• Transfer of program from master(write in RAM, Memory Module)

(2) Check of Redundant Composition


• Check Switched I/O Access
• Transfer of switched I/O module information from master
• Scan redundant I/O module information installed at standby side
• Comparison with I/O parameter

(3) Transfer of invariable data from master


• Transfer of flag from master(if necessary, divided into several scans)
• Check the flag not changed and then proceed to step (4)

(4) Transfer of variable data from master


• Some User Data area and system buffer

8-2
Chapter 8. Program Operation

(5) Check synchronization with master


• Synchronizes the operation information in CPU.

(6) Participation in operation at the same time with master


• Run redundant operation from input refresh

8.1.5 Operation Condition

8.1.5.1 Normal Operation


• If power applied, master CPU module checks system configuration. If power applied late in extended
base, front display shows checking base such as ‘Eb xx’ until power on.
In STOP mode, an error occurred after 10 seconds’ wait.
• After modifying the program, initial operation starts in Cold Restart.
• When restarting the system stopped in normal operation, do as parameter setting. There are Mode
key, GMWIN, Power OFF, and reset.
• If restarting the system of Warm Restart in Cold Restart Mode, Use Reset Key or ‘OVERALL
RESET’ of GMWIN.
• If stopped by errors during operation, restart will be determined according to the type of error and
remedy (See ‘Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting’).

8.1.5.2 If I/O Skip set


• Exclude skip setting module from the operation. Therefore skip troubleshooting.
If skip released during operation, it will be included in operation normally. For details, see ‘9.2 I/O
Skip’ and 9.3 ‘Module Replacement During Operation’.

8.1.5.3 If Trouble Mask set


• If trouble mask set, it will be included in operation. Perform troubleshooting. Continues to operate
even if module type inconsistent error occurred in initial start. For details see ‘9.1 Trouble Mask’.
• If mask set at overall base with power off, CPU waits for power on in standby.

8.2 I/O Forced ON/OFF

8.2.1 Forced ON/OFF Setting


• Set Forced On/Off in accordance with areas of Input (I) and Output (Q).
• Set Input and Output respectively and operate from when ‘Forced I/O Setting Permission’ set.
• If actual I/O module not mounted, setting is enabled.
(For detailed information, see ‘GMWIN User’s Manual’.)

8-3
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.2.2 Forced ON/OFF Processing Time and Method

8.2.2.1 Forced Input


• Input(I) updates Input(I) image area by replacing contact data set in Forced On/Off with forced data
out of those read from input module at input refresh. User program runs the operation with forced
data at forced contact.
• When setting forced input of input contact in triplex configuration, designate input position of
redundant base.

Remarks

• If forcedly controlling the contact of switched base from triplex input, input value is not changed and an error
detected in its contact.
• If controlling the input used for system monitoring such as output feedback, system error can be occurred.

8.2.2.2 Forced Output


• Output(Q) outputs the data by replacing contact output set in Forced On/Off with forced data out of
output image data having operation results at output refresh after a completion of user program
operation.
• Redundant output designates output position at redundant base and both of two outputs will be
output simultaneously.

8.2.2.3 Forced On/Off Processing Area


• Input (I) and Output (Q) area for Forced On/Off is designated bigger than actual area.
If designating remote I/O with this area, forced On/Off can be used equally with basic I/O area.

Remarks

• In case of OFF -> ON, Operation Mode Change and Reset Key operation, forced On/Off setting data
previously set is retained in PLC.
• If program download and backup broken, forced On/Off setting data will be erased.
On/Off setting data will be erased in operating program memory even if restarted with flash memory
program.
• To set new forced data from start, release all setting of Input and Output respectively using ‘ERASE’ key.

8-4
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.3 Immediate I/O

This can be used effectively when reading immediately input contact during program operation or
outputting immediately operation results at output contact.

8.3.1 Immediate Input


In case of Immediate Input, use 'DIREC_IN' function and if completed, Input (I) image area will be
updated and applied immediately at subsequent operation.

8.3.2 Immediate Output


y In case of Immediate Output, use 'DIREC_O' function and if completed, Output(Q) image area data
will be immediately output at output module with operation results.
y Redundant output designates output position at redundant base and both of two outputs will be
output simultaneously.

8.3.3 Forced ON/OFF


In case of forced I/O processing, forced On/Off setting is valid.

8.4 Memory Structure

CPU module contains two kinds of memory available for users. One is program memory saving
user’s program for establishing system and the other is data memory saving data during operation.

8.4.1 Program Memory Structure


The following table describes items and size of program memory.
Item Size
Overall Program Memory Area 512kbyte
System Area:
• System Program 13kbyte
• Back up
Parameter Area:
• Basic Parameter
• I/O Parameter
35kbyte
• Highway Link Parameter
• Interrupt Setting Information
• Redundant Parameter
Program Area:
• Scan program
• Task program
• User defined function/function block
464kbyte
• Standard Library
• Access Variable
• Variable Initialization Information
• Retained Variable Designation Information

8-5
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.4.2 Data Memory Structure


The following table describes items and size of data memory.

Item Size
Overall data memory Area 512kbyte
System Area:
• I/O Information Table
50kbyte
• Forced I/O Table
• Module Skip Table and etc.
System Flag Area 4,096byte
Input Image Area(%IX) 4,096byte
Output Image Area(%QX) 4,096byte
Direct Variable Area(%M) 0~64kbyte
256kbyte -
Symbolic Variable Area (Max.)
Direct Variable Area
Redundant System Flag Area 254kbyte
Stack Area 4,096kbyte

1) System Area
Saves CPU module self-producing data for system management and system control data through
GMWIN.
2) System Flag Area
As saving area of user flag and system flag as shown in Chapter 11, users control this with flag
name.

3) Input Image Area


Where input data read from input module saved in automatically. Entire range between %IX0.0.0
and %IX63.7.63 but available between %IX0.0.0 and %IX15.7.63 for actual input module area. The
area without actual module can be used freely in program.
Especially, conveniently used to save data of remote input through highway link.

4) Output Image Area


As memory of operation results, saved data will be output automatically through output module.
Entire range between %QX0.0.0 and %QX63.7.63, but available between %QX0.0.0
and %QX15.7.63 for actual output module area.
The area without actual module can be used freely in program.
Especially, conveniently used to save data of remote output through highway link.

5) Direct Variable Area


Where accessible to direct memory data through variable name previously designated by system
such as %MX0, %MB0, %MW0, %MD0, %ML0, and etc. Users will set the capacity in ‘OPTION’
menu of GMWIN.

8-6
Chapter 8. Program Operation

6) Symbolic Variable Area


Variable made in programming by users, e.g. as data memory with name designated, there are
general variable, global variable, and instance memory.
The variable used in program block is located in ‘PB Instance Memory’ of desired program. One
used in function block is located in ‘FB Instance Memory’. The max. size of PB instance memory is
32K Byte and if exceeding the max. size, program block can be divided and global variable used.

8.4.3 Resource Global Variable Processing

8.4.3.1 Resource Global Variable


Resource Global Variable means that sharable between programs and corresponds to Direct
Variable and Symbolic Variable designated as Resource Global. These have one memory physically.
That is, these are located in ‘Direct Variable Area(%M)’ and ‘Symbolic Variable Area’.

Direct Variable can be used directly in each program and symbolic one used after designating those
with the same name as ‘VAR-EXTERNAL’.

Resource Global Variable can be written in applicable variable immediately when program
performed. There are no problem between programs in scan task while processing sequentially, there
may be confusion of data due to intervention of task program while running scan program. Take
considerations of the followings in programming.

(1) When using resource global variable, don’t ‘Write’ the same variable in more than two task
programs. In other words, do ‘write’ in one task and ‘read’ in required location unconditionally.
(2) When doing program block, save the value of global variable in Local Variable and then do
program using Local Variable value. Then, homogeneous data will be hold in program block
even if global variable value changed by task during program operation.

8-7
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.5 Scan Time

This means the time elapsed after scan program of one time until restarting of scan program.

8.5.1 Scan Time Calculation


Scan Time means the sum between processing times of user’s scan and task programs and PLC
internal processing time. Scan time is calculated as shown in the following equation.

8.5.1.1 Scan Time Calculation Equation


• Scan Time = Scan Program Processing Time + Task Program Processing Time + PLC internal
processing time
• Scan Program Processing Time = Processing time of user’s program not designated as Task
Program
• Task Program Processing Time = Sum of task program processing time treated for one scan
• PLC Internal Processing Time = Self diagnosis time + I/O refresh time + internal data processing
time + Communication service processing time
Scan time can be varied greatly due to task program operation, I/O redundant composition and
communication data treatment.

Remarks

• Scan Time can be increased excessively when standby system participated in operation.
• Scan Time is longer than stand-alone operation during redundant operation.

8.5.1.2 Scan Time Related Flag


Scan Time is saved in system flag area.
• _SCAN_MAX : Max. Scan Time (1ms Unit)
• _SCAN_MIN : Min. Scan Time (1ms Unit)
• _SCAN_CUR : Current Scan Time (1ms Unit)

To measure processing time of task program for calculating scan time, enter task number to be
measured in '_STSK_NUM' of system operation information flag in Variable Monitor Mode and monitor
'_STSK_MAX, _STSK_MIN, and _STSK_CUR'.

8.5.1.3 Ex. Of Scan Time Calculation


In case of users program structure as shown below (see 7.4.7), how to calculate max. scan time is as
follows.

• Task: T_SLOW ( Interval := T#30ms, Priority := 2, Task No. : 0 )


PROC_1 ( Single := %MX0, Priority := 3, Task No.:48 )
E_INT1 ( Interrupt:= 0, Priority := 1, Task No.:32 )

8-8
Chapter 8. Program Operation

• Program : Program --> S0, S1, S2, S3,…,S9 (Scan)


Program --> P1 with task T_SLOW
Program --> P2 with task PROC_1
Program --> P3 with task E_INT1

(1) With only scan program(S0,…S9) run excepting task program, measure scan time
(_SCAN_MAX) while doing communication service through communication module and
monitor through GMWIN.
(2) To measure running time of positive period program, start program including positive period
task program, register '_STSK_NUM, _STSK_MAX, _STSK_MIN, _STSK_CUR' flag in
GMWIN Variable Monitor Mode, enter Task Number ‘0’ at '_STSK_NUM’ and then measure
the value of ‘_STSK_MAX’.
(3) Start the program including single task program, enter task number ‘48’ at '_STSK_NUM’, start
task in GMWIN (1->%MX0), and then measure the value of _STSK_MAX’.
(4) Start the program including interrupt task program, enter task number ‘32’ at '_STSK_NUM’,
turn ON the input of interrupt module, and then measure the value ‘_STSK_MAX’.
If the max. run time being Tscan(S0~S9) = 80 ms, Tp1 = 4 ms, Tp2 = 7 ms,
(5) Tp3 = 1 ms, basic san time will be 87 msec (Tscan + Tp2) if single task started during program
operation and scan time be 95 msec(Tscan + Tp2 + Tp1 x 2) with two times positive period
occurred. If external task occurred three times, scan time will be 98 msec(Tscan + Tp2 + Tp1 x
2 + Tp3 x 3) and max. scan time be 102 msec(Tscan + Tp2 + Tp1 x 3 + Tp3 x 3) with positive
period run once more. If external task can be occurred within 102 msec, add its processing
time and review the number positive period occurred. (See 7.4.7 Ex. Of Program Composition
and Processing’ timing diagram)

8.5.2 Scan Watchdog Timer


(1) Scan Watchdog Timer is used to detect operation delay due to an error of users program.
Detection time of Scan Watchdog Timer is set at basic parameter.
(2) Scan Watchdog Timer monitors Scan Elapsed Time during operation and if sensing excessive
detection time, PLC immediately stops operation and perform the followings.
y Overall Output OFF
y Set Error LED of CPU Module to ‘ON’
y Display ‘E 040’ at 7 segment of CPU Module.

(3) If Scan Watchdog time is expected to exceed in a specific program process during user’s program
operation, use ‘WDT_RST’ function. If ‘WDT_RST’ function started, initialize the elapsed time of
watchdog timer and restart from 0.
(4) Power Input, Manual Reset Switch or Mode Change to STOP can be used to exit scan error.

8-9
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.5.3 Delay Time in Redundant Operation

8.5.3.1 Delay Time in Redundant Operation Entry


To entry redundant operation among single operations, scan time will be increased excessively when
standby CPU activated.
y Not increased over 50ms during program transmission.
y Can be increased over 50ms as long as data transmitted as a package.
If the sum of symbolic variable and %M area setting being within 10K byte, delay time can be within
50ms and increased about 2ms per 1K byte if exceeded.

8.5.3.2 Scan Time in Redundant Operation


Scan time can be increased in redundant operation basically compared with single operation and
greatly increased according to simultaneous operating number within one scan of special module FB
and communication FB. Communication FB can choose sequential operating method.

Remarks

Scan Time will be increased excessively to entry Redundant Operation from Single when standby CPU
activated.

8.6 RTC : Real Time Clock

This PLC CPU module is basically mounted with RTC. RTC provides ‘Time Display Flag’ available
in program and displays the time on Fault Report. It also provides hot restart time measuring when Hot
Restart used. In case of a power failure more than 20ms or Power OFF, clock continues operation by
battery back up. RTC time value updates at system flag area every scan. RTC time value is enabled in
Read/Write through GMWIN (See ‘PLC Information’ of ‘On-line’ Menu of GMWIN).

8.6.1 RTC Internal Data


Built-in Clock IC has the characteristics as shown in the following table.

Item Data
Year 4 digits in solar calendar
Month 1 ~ 12
Day 1 ~ 31
Hour 0 ~ 23 (24 hours)
Min. 0 ~ 59
Sec. 0 ~ 59
1/100
0 ~ 99
seconds
Day of the
0 ~ 6 (Monday ~ Sunday)
Week

8-10
Chapter 8. Program Operation

If using time in Operation Program, do programming using User Flag ‘_RTC_DATE’, ‘_RTC_TOD’,
‘_RTC_WEEK’ available in the above table. It can be used in system control such as Start/Stop and
Time Stamp of operation history, and etc.
‘_RTC_TIME[n]’, provided as system flag, is provided in BCD form to facilitate data transfer to simple
display device or the equipment where time data type not handled.

8.6.2 RTC Time Error


There can be errors of the max. ‘±5 seconds/1 month’ according to operating environment of PLC.

Remarks

y If battery back up stooped more than 30 min., RTC may stop its operation.
Time data was not set when the product purchased. Set and then use time data in system setup.
y If writing time data in RTC besides the range specified in the above table, it doesn’t operate normally.
( Ex. : 13 Month 32 Day 28 Hour )
y If RTC error found, _RTC_ERR of system flag _CNF_WAR turns ON.
If RTC error corrected, _RTC_ERR of system flag _CNF_WAR turns OFF(For error of RTC by CPU, see
_CNF_A,B_WAR 의 _RTC_A_ERR, _RTC_B_ERR).
y RTC stop or error can be occurred due to battery error and etc. If writing new time value in RTC, RTC error
will be resolved.

8.7 Precautions when using special module

GLOFA system provides convenience and high performance of program compared with the
previous method when using special module. Take some precautions when establishing the system.
Make you understood what the following describes and review the applicable system.

8.7.1 Special Module Programming


To make the program simple and prevent programming error, it is provided with function block in
separately at each special module.

(1) Function block takes a role as interface between data of users program and special module,
monitors the operation of special module, and displays errors. Special error detection program
is not required.
(2) Function block consists of ones for ‘initialization’ and ‘controlling’ the operation of special
module.
(3) Function block is provided with one for single module(attached to switched base) and for
redundant module(attached to redundant base) according to mounting method.

Remarks

For detailed function block, see ‘Appendix 2.3 Special module function block table’ of this manual and user’s
manual of special module.

8-11
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.7.2 Special Module Initialization


To define the operation characteristics of special module, do program using ‘Initialization’ function
block. Generally, data range, resolution and filtering for channels are designated. You have only do
once when starting system.

(1) When system started, initialization shall be completed before master CPU performs scan
program and so done in restart program (initialization task program). But function block
required to change set data during operation can be done in general program.
(2) Standby CPU doesn’t perform initialization program. Special module, which is located at
redundant base and controlled by standby CPU among redundant special modules, performs
module initialization in the method of automatically transferring the information of special
module to master.

Remarks

• Special module of switched base can cause errors in a power failure of applicable extended base unit. If
programming to override errors and proceeds to operation, special module can be restarted using
GMWIN after a recovery of power(See ‘Special Module Initialization’ of 9.3.3 Switched Base
Replacement’.

8.7.3 Special Module Control


To control the operation of special module, do programming using function block to be controlled for
each module. This can be done regardless of the position of program. But it is recommended to
handle input and output with one function block through overall scan program for efficient system
management and use data memory for operation inside of system.

(1) Control of Single Module


• Special Module attached to Switched Base has the same external connection and program
method with that of single system.

(2) Control of Redundant Module


• Analogue output module has the same program method with that of single system. For
connection method and use, see ’10.1.3 Redundancy of Analogue I/O Module’.
• Function block for analogue input module provides both two input data. Check module state,
channel state and data value and choose one selectively on the program. For connection
method and use, see ’10.1.3 Redundancy of Analogue I/O Module’.

Remarks

• It is recommended to use array type function block rather than single channel to minimize the scan time.
• If using hot restart, output the standard of STOP mode until new data used in the program. If writing every
scan data in special module, immediately normal output can be done. But when output data value changed
or written periodically, standard output can be done until that time. To keep the continuity of output, it is
recommended to output the data one time in hot restart program after initialization of special module.

8.7.4 Module Replacement During Operation


If replacing extended base or module during system operation, the initialization of special module and
data recovery is enabled using GMWIN.
If a failure of extended base or power OFF, the system continues operation normally and proceeds to
operation without restart of CPU module in ON->OFF->ON(See ‘9.3 Module Replacement during
Operation’).

8-12
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.8 How to Use Memory Module

This describes how to retain memory and how to mount memory module and operate PLC.
This PLC uses Flash Memory as memory module. Memory Module is enabled in read/write with
mounted at CPU module without special write-dedicated equipment.

8.8.1 How to Write User’s Program in Memory Module


Always turn off the power when mounting memory module at CPU module.

8.8.1.1 Writing in Master CPU


This describes how to write user’s program in Memory Module.

Initiation
Power Off

Change the operation mode into Remote STOP and then turn Off

Mount Memory

Mount the connector with memory module of CPU module.

Power On

Run
Select Flash Memory Write in GMWIN.
(As the command to write the contents of program memory in
memory module, there should be memory program).

End

8.8.1.2 Writing to Standby CPU


If standby CPU started while running master CPU, standby CPU receives the program from master
and if memory module mounted in standby CPU, run memory module write automatically.

Remarks

• When mounting memory module to write user’s program in it, its contents can be transferred to program
area if power applied in Run Mode.
• You can download the program for upload with capacity more than that of program memory of CPU
module using GMWIN. This time, it is recommended to use memory module with capacity of 2Mbyte more
than that of program memory.
• During program debugging, operate without memory module and after a completion of debugging, mount
with memory module.

8-13
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.8.2 How to operate using Memory Module


(1) Always turn OFF when mounting memory module at CPU module.
(2) User’s program saved in memory module starts operation after moved to program memory of CPU
module when operation mode changed to RUN by Power ON or Mode Change. Used in
preparation of data loss of program RAM in CPU Module.

8.8.2.1 How to Operate


This describes how to operate using memory module.

Initiation
Power Off
Power OFF After changed to STOP mode in operation mode

Mount Memory
Mount memory module with user’s program saved at mounting
connector of CPU module.

Power On
Run write of memory module if mounting memory module without
program.

Change Operation
Change operation mode to RUN mode.

Check
Check changed program run.

END

8-14
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.9 Flag For displaying outside fault

This flag is provided for users to detect fault of outside equipment and perform system stop and
warning. If using this flag, outside fault will be displayed without complex program and fault position be
monitored without special device(GMWIN and etc.) or source program.

8.9.1 Detection and Classification of Outside Fault


Outside fault can be detected by user’s program and classified into Heavy fault(error), which stops
PLC operation according to detected fault, and light fault(warning), which continues operation of PLC
and only displays fault state. ANC_ERR[n] flag will be used in heavy fault and ANC_WB[n] flag used in
light fault.

8.9.2 Heavy Fault of Outside Equipment


When heavy fault detected in user’s program, if classifying user’s defined error type and writing the
value excepting 0 in system flag _ANC_ERR[n], a fault displayed in ANNUN_ER of CNF_ER,
representative system error flag, when a completion of scan program. Then, PLC turns off all output
modules and becomes an error equally with PLC self-detection.

In case of fault, users can find the cause of fault using GMWIN or by monitoring ANC_ERR[n] flag.
ANC_ERR[n] has 16(n : between 0 and 15) fields and classifies fault status greatly. If is able to write
fault number designated temporarily by users in each field and the number can be between 1 and
65,535.

Ex.)
Error Detection
MOVE

10 _ANC_ERR[0]

8.9.3 Light fault of Outside Equipment


When light fault detected in user’s program, turns On the flag of desired position according to the
usage out of system flag ANCWB[n]. When a completion of scan program, search from ANC_WB[0]
and in case of warning, it will be displayed in ANNUNWR of CNFWAR, system warning representative
flag, and light fault number of outside equipment will be written from ANCWAR[0] to ANCWAR[7]
according to occurrence order. In case of warning, users can find the cause of fault using GMWIN or
by monitoring ANCWAR[n] and ANCWB[n] flag.

If light fault removed from outside equipment, e.g. after a completion of user’s program, those
removed from _ANC_WB[n] will be automatically deleted from _ANC_WAR[n] flag and if all removed,
_ANNUN_WR display of system flag _CNF_WAR will be reset.

Ex.)

Error Detection _ANC_WB[10]

8-15
Chapter 8. Program Operation

-- Ex. Of Light Fault Detection and Flag Display of Outside Equipment --

_ANNUN_WR = 1 During user’s program operation, if system error detected with user’s
_ANC_WAR[0] = 10 program and set _ANC_WB[10] to ON, complete operating scan, and
_ANC_WAR[1] = 0 _ANNUN_WR 과 _ANC_WAR[0..7] will be shown as in the left.
_ANC_WAR[2] = 0
_ANC_WAR[3] = 0
_ANC_WAR[4] = 0
_ANC_WAR[5] = 0
_ANC_WAR[6] = 0
_ANC_WAR[7] = 0

_ANNUN_WR = 1
_ANC_WAR[0] = 10 After the next scan completed, if Nos. 1, 2, 3, 10, 15, 40, 50, 60, and 75 set
_ANC_WAR[1] = 1 to ON, _ANC_WAR[n] will be shown as in the left.
_ANC_WAR[2] = 2
No. 10 has lower priority than Nos. 1, 2, and 3, but set to ON in the
_ANC_WAR[3] = 3
previous scan(occurred in advance), so it will be written before
_ANC_WAR[4] = 15
_ANC_WAR[n]. Although _ANC_WB[75] set to ON, the warning occurred
_ANC_WAR[5] = 40 in advance will not be displayed due to _ANC_WAR[n] full.
_ANC_WAR[6] = 50
_ANC_WAR[7] = 60

_ANNUN_WR = 1
_ANC_WAR[0] = 1
_ANC_WAR[1] = 2 After the next scan completed, if Nos., 2, 3, 15, 40, 50, 60, 75 set to ON,
_ANC_WAR[2] = 3 _ANC_WAR[n] will be shown as in the left.
_ANC_WAR[3] = 15
_ANC_WAR[4] = 40 Because No. 10 warning removed, it will be deleted from _ANC_WAR[0]
_ANC_WAR[5] = 50 and the content of _ANC_WAR[1..7] be get ahead of. After data moved,
_ANC_WAR[6] = 60 _ANC_WAR[7] will be empty and _ANC_WB[75] be written in
_ANC_WAR[7] = 75 _ANC_WAR[7].

_ANNUN_WR = 0
_ANC_WAR[0] = 0 If all warnings displayed in _ANC_WB[n] during operation, _ANNUN_WR
_ANC_WAR[1] = 0 and _ANC_WAR[n] will be shown as in the left.
_ANC_WAR[2] = 0
_ANC_WAR[3] = 0
_ANC_WAR[4] = 0
_ANC_WAR[5] = 0
_ANC_WAR[6] = 0
_ANC_WAR[7] = 0

Remarks

When light error detected, error will not be displayed in CPU Module.

8-16
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.10 Operation in Instantaneous Power Failure

CPU Module detects instantaneous power failure when input power off or the voltage of input power
lower than the specified.
If CPU detected instantaneous power failure, perform operations as follows.

8.10.1 Instantaneous Power Failure less than Permissible 20ms


(1) If instantaneous power failure detected, temporarily stop operation with output state remained.
(2) If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation.
(3) When instantaneous power failure occurred within 20ms, operation delay time will be ‘power failure
time +8~20ms’.
Also if instantaneous power failure released, restart operation after delay of 16 to 28 ms for input
normalization of AC input.
(4) If operation stopped due to instantaneous power failure, scan watchdog timer continues counting.
For example, If 15ms instantaneous power failure occurred with scan watchdog time set to 200ms
and scan time to 190ms, scan watchdog time error will be occurred.
(5) If operation stopped due to instantaneous power failure, timer counting and positive interrupt timer
counting continues operation(For task in instantaneous power failure, see 7.4.2.3 System Start and
Task Performance in instantaneous power failure).

8.10.2 Instantaneous Power Failure Exceeding Permissible 20 ms


When a power failure more than 20ms occurred, PLC will be restarted. Power module can supply
CPU module with normal DC power up to 20ms after AC_Fail. This time, CPU module keeps stop and
output state. If AC power not recovered for 20ms, CPU module turns off output and becomes in
standby. In subsequent power recovery, restart operation as in normal power on.

Power Failure Power Recovery

0 END 0 END 0 END

Power Failure within 20ms


CPU holds output and
Temporarily stop operation

Power Failure Power Recovery


Output OFF
0 END 0
Restart

After a power failure more than


20ms
20ms, turn OFF output and stop
operation.

8-17
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.10.3 Instantaneous Power Failure During Redundant Operation


Factors of instantaneous power failure are as follows in redundant system.
(1) Instantaneous power failure of master CPU
(2) Instantaneous power failure of standby CPU
(3) Instantaneous power failure of extended base

8.10.3.1 Power Failure of Master CPU


• If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation.
• If power failure not recovered exceeding 20ms, master stops operation and standby CPU is switched
to master to proceed to operation

8.10.3.2 Power Failure of Standby CPU


• If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation.
• If power failure not recovered exceeding 20ms, master proceeds to operation and standby CPU
stops operation.

8.10.3.3 Simultaneous Power Failure of Master/Standby CPU


• If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to operation.
• If power failure not recovered exceeding 20ms, overall redundant system stop operation.
• When power recovered, the power of master shall be recovered to restart system.

8.10.3.4 Power Failure of Extended Base


• To prevent abnormal input and output even in instantaneous power failure of extended base, stops
operation and monitors instantaneous power failure as in CPU power failure.
• Power Failure of Extended Base : If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms, proceeds to
operation and if not recovered exceeding 20ms, stops operation.
• Power Failure of Redundant Base(Only one side): If instantaneous power failure released within
20ms, proceeds to operation and if not recovered exceeding 20ms, excludes the base and proceeds
to operation
• Power Failure of Redundant Base(Both side):: If instantaneous power failure released within 20ms,
proceeds to operation and if not recovered exceeding 20ms, stops operation.
• If power recovered in extended base after instantaneous power failure exceeding 20ms, system will
be restarted.

Remarks

If instantaneous power failure occurred in redundant system, its operation will be delayed about 20ms to
detect the fault.

8-18
Chapter 8. Program Operation

8.11 History Log-In

There are error history, power off history, redundant operation mode change history and operation
mode change of respective CPU. Each history can be saved up to the latest 16(For detailed, see 11.5
System Error and Warning Detailed Flag and ‘PLC Information’ in GMWIN User’s Manual).

8.11.1 History Log-in and Content


(1) Error History (_ERR_HIS[n])
• Log-in : When error occurred during operation
• Content : Occurred time, error code

(2) Power Off History (_AC_F_TM[n], _AC_F_CNT)


• Log-in : When power off occurred in RUN mode
• Content : Occurred time(16), Occurred number(1)

(3) Redundant Operation Mode Change History (_RED_HIS[n])


• Log-in: When redundant operation mode changed
• Content : Occurred time, Changed redundant operation mode, restart mode

(4) CPU Operation Mode Change History (_MODE_A_HIS[n], _MODE_B_HIS[n])


• Log-in: When each CPU mode changed
• Content : Occurred time, Changed CPU operation mode, restart mode

8.11.2 Reset of Saved Information


It will not be deleted until doing in the menu of GMWIN.

8-19
Chapter 9. Error Remedy

Chapter 9. Error Remedy


9.1 Fault Mask

9.1.1 Usage and Operation of Fault Mask


Fault Mask is used to override and proceed to operation of program if fault occurred in designated
module or base during operation. Module or Base designated with fault mask performs update of
normal I/O data and trouble check until fault occurred.
If fault occurred in module or base with fault mask set during operation, CPU module flickers front
display and program proceeds to operation. It will not be displayed in error representative flag and
GMWIN. If detailed flag monitored in the area with fault mask set, error can be found.

9.1.2 How to Set Fault Mask


(1) Fault Mask is able to be set for fault of module or base and user defined error(_ANNUN_ER).
(2) Module fault mask can be set directly by GMWIN on-line menu(fault mask setting) or user’s program
and by parameter in ‘Redundant Parameter’ setting menu of programming.
(3) 12-slot base can be recognized as subsequent 2 base, so all of two base areas should be set.

9.1.3 By Flag
Fault Mask Flag can be preset before error occurred and set by error task program started when error
occurred.(See ‘System Fault Mask Flag’).

Remarks

• If removing cause of errors without error flag deleted in CPU module, system stops operation. Before
releasing of fault mask flag, check error flag.

9.1.4 By Parameter
In programming, it can be set in parameter, compiled with program, and then downloaded. Parameter
setting will be copied to fault mask flag in first initialization of system after download of program. In spite
of parameter setting, flag can be changed using flag control during operation.

Remarks

• Modules set in Redundant Base continues operation if any one failed. When corresponding two modules
failed, to continue operation, set fault mask.
• When Power OFF->ON, Operation Mode changed and Reset Key operated, fault mask setting data set
previously would be retained and performed in PLC. It is able to be deleted using GMWIN or program.
• Data of Fault Mask flag are updated with parameter data as follows.
1) Restart operation after download of program using GMWIN
2) If operating program memory has different program with flash memory module and restarts operation
with memory module program loaded into program memory.
3) If memory backup broken due to drop of battery voltage

9-1
Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9.2 I/O Skip(I/O Module, Extended Base Operation Miss Designated)

9.2.1 Usage and Operation of I/O Skip


I/O skip function excludes the designated module and base from operation. Designated module and
base stops trouble check and update of I/O data from the time designated. It can be used for replacing
base during operation and temporary operation with fault excluded from. For module replacement, see
9.3 Module Replacement during Operation.

9.2.2 I/O Skip Setting and I/O Data Processing


(1) Skip can be set in the unit of module or base.
It is set in on-line menu(I/O Skip) of GMWIN. For detailed, see ‘GMWIN User’s Manual’.

(2) 12-slot base can be recognized as subsequent 2 base, so all of two base areas should be set.

(3) Input(I) Image stops input refresh and keeps previous value of skip setting. But, image control is
valid
by Forced On/Off.
Actual output of output module turns OFF in skip setting, but output(Q) image varies to the operation
of user’s program regardless of skip setting. Output value control of output module is disabled after
skip setting.
(4) Skip function will be run equally when immediate I/O function used.

Remarks

• When Power OFF->ON, Operation Mode changed and Reset Key operated, skip setting data set
previously would be retained and performed in PLC. Skip function is able to be released using GMWIN or
program.
• Skip setting data are deleted if any of the following occurred.
1) If restarting operation after download of program using GMWIN
2) If operating program memory has different program with flash memory module and restarts operation
with memory module program loaded into program memory.
3) If memory backup broken due to drop of battery voltage

9.2.3 Application to Redundant System


When installing in Redundant Base, Both of A-side and B-side can be set and only one as required.

9-2
Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9.3 Module Replacement During Operation

9.3.1 General of Module Replacement During Operation


Module Replacement can be varied in accordance the position of module to be replaced during
redundant operation. It is divided into switched base and redundant base.

First check the followings when replacing the module


(1) If stopping CPU system and replacing module,
When any CPU stopped, check there is no error or warning at the side to perform one-sided
operation. For example, in case of abnormal communication line at the side to operate,
communication can be disconnected when changed into One-Sided Operation.

(2) If using I/O redundancy


If stopping some or overall faulty equipment, first check for abnormal. Check there is no contact
error in switched base or the part performing one-sided operation during output. If no error in
contact of switched base, first resolve the fault of switched base prior to repair of redundant base.

REMARK

• In GMR Redundant system, it is possible to replace the module during operation. But special precautions
should be taken that it can cause mis-operation of overall system.
• 12-slot base can be recognized as subsequent 2 bases, so skip and fault mask should be set for all of
two base areas.
• Always set fault mask sequentially during replacement to prevent mis-operation of replaced module or
overall system.

9.3.2 Replacement of CPU redundancy


Stop operation of desired CPU system and then replace CPU redundant.

9.3.2.1 Replacement Sequences of CPU Module, Communication Module, Remote Interface


Module
Using mode key of DIFA module, set CPU as one-sided operation to continue operation and
exclude CPU to be replaced from operation.
(2) Turns off the side to be replaced.
(3) Replace CPU Module, Communication Module, Interface Module, or Power Module.
(4) Supply power and check each module for normal operation.
(5) Check the version of added module matched with operating system(redundant operation enable).
(6) Set mode key of DIFA module to A+B and redundant operation.

9-3
Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9.3.2.2 Replacement Sequences of DIF Module


(1) Set mode key of DIFA Module to one-sided operation of CPU to continue operation.
Open the cover at the right of base and connect the power of base with that of DIF module(This
time, power module of B side should be keep in normal operation).
(3) Pull out DIF module.
(4) Connect power terminal to DIF module to be replaced and insert base.
(5) Restart stopped CPU, and then check each modules for normal operation.
(6) Set DIFA key to A+B and redundant operation.

9.3.2.3 Repair of Base


(1) Using DIF key, set CPU as one-sided operation to continue operation and exclude CPU to be
repaired from operation.
(2) Turn off the side to be replaced and remove modules from base.
(3) Replace IC mounted at base.
(4) Mount modules, supply power, and then check each module for normal operation.
Set Mode Key of DIFA module to A+B and redundant operation.

Remarks

• When CPU stopped, attached communication and I/O system stopped simultaneously. Check there is no
error in remaining CPU communication and I/O system.

9.3.3 Replacement of Switched Base


Replace module without stopping operation of CPU in Switched Base.

9.3.3.1 Module Replacement After Base Operation Stopped


(1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN.
(To prevent master changed during module replacement, set skips to A CPU and B CPU systems
regardless of master CPU.
(2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN.
(3) Set ‘OPER’ switch of remote I/F Module(receiver) to ‘N’.
(4) Turns off the base.
(5) Replace module.
(6) Reapply the power.
(7) Set ‘OPER’ switch of remote I/F Module(receiver) to ‘Y’.
(8) Perform initialization in GMWIN if special module located in the base.
(9) Release skip setting of the base in GMWIN.
(10) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’).
If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1).
(11) Release fault mask and return to normal operation.

Remarks

• If power down without switch control of interface module, overall system becomes AC_Fail state. Take
precautions of it.

9-4
Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9.3.3.2 Module Replacement after Module Operation Stopped(Digital Module)


When replacing the module in certain operation, exceptional working is enabled as follows.
1) Module Replacement of the base that consisted of only digital I/O module.
(1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN.
(To prevent master changed during module replacement, set skips to A CPU and B CPU systems
regardless of master CPU.
(2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN.
(3) Replace module.
(4) Release skips setting of the base in GMWIN.
(5) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’).
If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1).
(6) Release fault mask and return to normal operation.

Remarks

• In these procedures, I/O module operated in the same base can cause wrong data instantaneously.
• Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault
mask at overall base.

2) Digital Module Replacement of the Base that consisted of combined Special Module
Replace as in the above (1) ‘Module Replacement of the base that consisted of only digital I/O module’.

Remarks

• Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault
mask at overall base. If an error occurred in special module, perform initialization in GMWIN for normal
operation.

3) Replacement of Special Module.


(1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN.
(To prevent master changed during module replacement, set skips to A CPU and B CPU systems
regardless of master CPU.
(2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN.
(3) Replace module.
(4) Perform initialization in GMWIN for replaced module.
(5) Release skips setting of the base in GMWIN.
(6) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’).
If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1).
(7) Release fault mask and return to normal operation.

Remarks

• Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault
mask at overall base. If an error occurred in special module, perform initialization in GMWIN for normal
operation.

9-5
Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9.3.3.3 Initialization of Special Module


Special Module is provided with channel initialization. If only special module required to be restarted
during overall system operation, perform initialization of applicable module in GMWIN. Some module
excepting A/D, D/A, TC, RTD is disavailable for initialization.
(1) Perform initialization in the point of ‘Initialization of Special Module’.
(2) Select ‘Special Module Initialization’ in on-line menu of GMWIN and perform initialization as shown
in
the following.
• Select Module: Designate the position of module to be initialized. When starting system, normally
checked module displays Initialization Screen. When restarting with module removed(E30
occurred)
or when mounting new module not in I/O parameter, initialization is disabled.
• Initialize Module : Set the same value with initial one designated in ‘Initialization Function Block’ of
program using key.
• If necessary, write D/A output data directly in module.

9.3.4 Replacement of Redundant Base


There are several replacement methods for redundant base.

9.3.4.1 Replacement Procedures after CPU system stopped


(1) Using DIF key, set CPU as one-sided operation to continue operation and exclude CPU to be
replaced from operation.
(2) Turns off the side to be replaced.
(3) Replace CPU Module, Communication Module, Interface Module, or Power Module.
(4) Turn on the base, restart desired CPU, and check it for normal operation.
(5) Set DIF key to A+B and redundant operation

Remarks

• When CPU stopped, attached communication and I/O system stopped simultaneously. Check there is no
error in remaining CPU communication and I/O system.

9.3.4.2 Module Replacement Procedures after stopping operation of the base to be replaced
(1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN.
(If replacement module belong to A CPU system, set only A and if belonged to B CPU, only B).
(2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN.
(3) Set ‘OPER’ switch of remote I/F Module to ‘N’.
(4) Turns off the base.
(5) Replace module.
(6) Reapply the power.
(7) Set ‘OPER’ switch of remote I/F Module to ‘Y’.
(8) Release skips setting of the base in GMWIN.
(9) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’).
If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1).
(10) Release fault mask and return to normal operation.

Remarks

• If power down without switch control of interface module, overall system becomes AC_Fail state. Take
precautions of it.

9-6
Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9.3.4.3 Module Replacement after Module Operation Stopped(Digital Module)


When replacing the module in certain operation, exceptional working is enabled as follows.
1) Module Replacement of the base that consisted of only digital I/O module.
(1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN.
(If replacement module belong to A CPU system, set only A and if belonged to B CPU, only B).
(2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN.
(3) Replace module.
(4) Release skips setting of the base in GMWIN.
(5) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’).
If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1).
(6) Release fault mask and return to normal operation.

Remarks

• In these procedures, I/O module operated in the same base can cause wrong data instantaneously.
• Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault
mask at overall base.

2) Digital Module Replacement of the Base that consisted of combined Special Module
Replace as in the above (1) ‘Module Replacement of the base that consisted of only digital I/O
module’.

Remarks

• Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault
mask at overall base. If an error occurred in special module, perform initialization in GMWIN for normal
operation.

3) Replacement of Special Module


(1) Perform skip setting to base to replace module in GMWIN.
(To prevent master changed during module replacement, set skips to A CPU and B CPU systems
regardless of master CPU.
(2) Set Fault Mask to the same base in GMWIN.
(3) Replace module.
(4) Perform initialization in GMWIN for replaced module.
(5) Release skips setting of the base in GMWIN.
(6) Check it for normal operation(Check Error Detailed Flag, see ’9.1.1’).
If replacing with the other module due to faulty replaced module, proceed to (1).
(7) Release fault mask and return to normal operation.

Remarks

• Due to an error of replaced module, the other fault of the same base can be detected. It is safe to set fault
mask at overall base. If an error occurred in special module, perform initialization in GMWIN for normal
operation.

4) Initialization of Special Module


• If replacing with faulty CPU off, read default from operating special module and perform initialization
automatically.
• If replacing with I/O partially off, see 9.3.3. Initialization of Special Module.

9-7
Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9.4 Error Remedy

9.4.1 Segment of Errors


Errors consists of error due to H/W failure of PLC, system configuration error, operation results error,
and etc. When errors occurred, operation stops(see Chap. 13 Troubleshooting), operation can be
continued by flag setting and error program.
(1) PLC Hardware Error
(2) System Configuration Error
(3) Operation Error of User’s Program
(4) Error detected by User’s Program

9.4.2 Standard Error Remedy


When an error occurred, PLC system records error content in flag and continues or stops operation in
accordance with error content and parameter setting.
If an error occurred corresponding to ‘System Error Flag’ after scan program performed, system
automatically performs error remedy program. Users can take an action against errors by making error
remedy program and parameter. If error remedy program not prepared, it is standard to stop operation
when errors occurred.

(1) PLC Hardware Error


If hardware error occurred in CPU module, power module, and etc., system stops operation.

(2) System Configuration Error


It is occurred when hardware configuration different between PLC and software. If errors occurred,
system stops operation.

(3) Operation Error of User’s Program


Errors occurred during user’s program operation could cause operation error to be displayed in error
flag and continue operation. If operation time exceeds scan watchdog time or attached I/O module
controlled normally, system stops operation.

(4) Error detected by User’s Program


Errors occurred in external control equipment and detected by user’s program. If errors detected,
system stops operation.

9.4.3 How to change by users


If the above errors occurred, users can change operation using error operation program, fault mask
parameter and flag control through program tool to do in the method besides standard.

(1) PLC Hardware Error


If hardware error occurred and CPU module, power module, and etc. not operated normally, system
can’t change the operation.

9-8
Chapter 9. Error Remedy

(2) System Configuration Error


Error occurred when hardware configuration different between PLC and software. If errors occurred
in initial check of cold and warm restart, system stops operation. If configuration changed such as
module loss during operation but flag mask flag set to desired slot, it continues operation.

(3) Operation Error of User’s Program


Errors occurred during user’s program operation could cause operation error to be displayed in error
flag(_ERR,_LER) and continue operation. User’s can stop operation referring to error flag. This time,
error task program will not be started. If error occurred when attached I/O module not controlled
normally, it continues operation by controlling error task program and fault mask flag by parameter.

(4) Error Detected by User’s Program


When errors detected in external control equipment(Heavy error detection error of external
equipment), it continues operation by controlling error task program and fault mask flag by parameter.

9.4.4 Detailed Error Task

9.4.4.1 Error Task Operation


If errors detected by CPU during program running, ‘_ERR_SYS’ task will be raised. This time if the
program prepared with ‘_ERR_SYS’ task as operating condition, it continues programming(See 7.2
How to run program).

9.4.4.2 Error Remedy in CPU


(1) After a completion of scan program, perform system trouble check in END and displays at desired
error flag if errors occurred.
(2) If the program registered with error task as operating condition, continue programming.
(3) If there is any error in error flag, system stops.
But if the error set to corresponding fault mask flag in user’s program performed in (2), system
continues operation(If setting fault mask flag, it is safe to set skip flag together.)

9.4.4.3 Error Task Operation Flag


(1) I/O Module Error: _IO_DEER, _FUSE_ER, _IO_RWER, _SP_IFER, RIQ_ER
(2) External Equipment Error: _ANNUN_ER

For detailed error, see ’11.2 System Error Flag’.

Remarks

• Displayed error flag will not be deleted automatically during operation even if an error removed(Power
OFF→ON),
• Error flag will not be deleted with Fault Mask Flag set.
• With error flag set, ‘_ERR_SYS’ task will be occurred in END of every scan to do programming.

9-9
Chapter 9. Error Remedy

9.4.5 Example of Error Task

9.4.5.1 System Configuration and Operation Setting

(1) System Configuration and Operation Setting


Digital Module installed at Slot 4 and 5 of No. 1 Extended Base is constructed so that overall system
operation might not be stopped when a failure of module occurred for driving operation indicator. If fault
mask set, module error flag will be displayed normally. Error task will be performed every scan if an
error found.

(2) Error Task Program Ex.


// - - - Fault Mask in Slot No. 4 and 5 of Base
Comm No. 1
ent
OR
Row 1 EN ENQ
_SLOT_M[1] _SLOT_M[1]
Row 2 IN1 OUT

16#30
Row 3 IN2

Row
4

Among the above program, 16#30 will be indicated as ‘0011 0000’, mask slot in base(See ‘_SLOT_M’
of Fault Mask Flag).

9-10
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10.1 Principle

10.1.1 Triplexing of Digital Input

10.1.1.1 Check of Digital Input

Read data of the same switch as three input contacts and if data matched with more than two,
choose the value as normal data. Three inputs can be read one another instantaneously by the factors
of switch position, switch state, wiring, filter delay of input module, and etc., but if no error in input,
normal data will be choose after some delay.

CPU determines it to be fault and remove from operation if any input value not changed until the
other two changed input data again.

10.1.1.2 Circuit Diagram of Redundant Input

Three inputs are located at Redundant Base A and B and Switched Base respectively. When
installing triplex input, multi power and sensor can be applied to increase availability of system.

[Fig. 10.1]Triplex Input Circuit


Sensor
power
Redundant
Base A

sensor

Redundant
Base B

Switched
Base

Choose data with more than 2 out of 3 inputs having


the same value(Ex %lx2.0.0-A,%12.0.0-B%l1.0.0 in
a pair).

10-1
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10.1.2 Redundancy of Digital Output

10.1.2.1 Check of Digital Output

For output module, wrong output can be occurred due to a failure of output module and element. Error
consists of Permanent 0 Output and 1 Output. This time, CPU can verify the fault and cut off the
output if faulty. Users shall set feedback input and measuring delay time to find where a fault
occurred(set in the unit of 16-point).

10.1.2.2 Circuit Diagram of Redundant Output

When installing redundant output, ‘Single Redundant Output’, ‘Detection of only Fault Contact’, and
‘A/B Discrimination and Load Power Off’ can be applied to increase fault detection and safety of
system.
Output Module

Load Power
(+) (-)
Redundant Load
Base A

Load

Switched
Base

Load Power
(+) (-)

Redundant
Base B

Input Module
* %QX2.4.0 ~ %QX2.4.15 : Redundant Output
%QX2.5.0 ~ %QX2.5.15 : Output Feedback
%QX2.2.0 ~ %QX2.2.1 : Load Power Off Output
%QX1.2.0 ~ %QX1.2.1 : Load Power Monitoring

When a failure of switched base occurred, it can be recognized that there are errors in both
Master Control Contacts of Redundant Base A and B. If possible, install each in separately at
Redundant Base.
[Fig. 10.2] Redundant Output Circuit Diagram

10-2
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10.1.3 Redundancy of Analogue I/O Module

10.1.3.1 Analogue Input

Analogue Input Module detects the error of input data by user’s program(FB). Redundant FB outputs
each module state and data as a result of operation. Users check module and select data. If short of
sensor detected in Module(Temperature Sensor Module), error will be detected in FB when sensor
disconnected.

[Fig. 10.3] Analogue Input Redundant Circuit Diagram


Analogue Sensor
Redundant
Base A

Sensor

Redundant
Base B

When signal received from one source as shown in the figure, only voltage input is enabled.
If using Current Input and TC, RTD sensor, install two sensors in separately.

10.1.3.2 Analogue Output

Installed at redundant I/O and outputs the same value. It realizes output redundant by outside
connection and detects output error using analogue input module by user’s program.

[Fig. 10.4] Analogue Output Redundant Circuit Diagram

Analogue Load
Redundant
Base A

Redundant
Base B

10-3
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10.1.4 Parameter Setting


(See 12.4 Redundant Parameter.)

10.2 I/O Processing Procedures and Method

10.2.1 I/O Processing Procedures


Redundant system has the same operation procedures with that of single system. Processing time
of I/O is the same with that of single system and added with Error Elimination by multi I/O during
process. The following figure shows flow chart of basic control program.

START

Input Image Area Refresh Input Module Contact

Scan Program Start


.
Perform Task
.
Program
.
Scan Program End
1 Scan

Output Image Area Refresh Output Module contact

END

[Fig.10.5] Flow Chart of Control Program

10.2.1.1 Considerations in I/O Definition

• Signal holding time of the signal entered in PLC has scan time longer than that of PLC. If input
changed rapidly, input signal may not be detected and in case of multi input, it can be detected as
contact Trouble.

• Take precautions when setting feedback time in feedback setting output.

• The scan time of redundant operation will be longer than that of single operation. While entering
redundant operation of standby CPU, scan time of master CPU will be longer temporarily. Take
considerations of it when defining I/O(See 8.5 Scan Time).

10-4
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10.2.2 Detailed Input Data Processing


This describes ‘input image area refresh’ for processing input data as shown in Fig. 10.5 Flow Chart
of Control Program. It describes how to extract data from three input values, how to treat wrong input,
and how to find fault.

10.2.2.1 Input Refresh Flow Chart

Input Data Scan Start


(1)
CPU A.B reads data from input
module.

(2)
Exchange read data.

(3)
Release the indication of ‘Wrong
Input’ in previous input or treat as
fault.

(4)
Determine right input value from
three input data according to
majority rule.

(5)
Additionally update ‘Wrong Input’
indication according to new data.

Scan Program Entry

[Fig. 10.6] Input Refresh Flow Chart

(1) Input Data Read


Master reads input of Redundant Base and Switched Base that it belonged to and Standby does
only input of Redundant Base.

(2) Data Change


Master receives the input of redundant base read by standby and standby does inputs of
Redundant and Switched Bases read by master. (If there is single base in A side, transfer single
base input into B side). Two CPU modules share the same input data.

(3) Wrong Input Processing


If changed into normal out of those indicated as wrong input in previous scan input check, it will be
released and if not changed and exceeded permissible trouble detection time, it will be treated as
fault.

(4) Right Input Value Determination


Determines Right input value by majority rules suing three input data).

(5) Wrong Input Detection


Compare three input data read from, indicate new wrong input, and monitor it in subsequent scan.
If faulty contacts remained, choose Right input value at two contacts and if both two being 1,
choose 1. Wrong input detection will not be done in remaining two contacts.

10-5
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10.2.3 Ex. Of Input Data Processing

10.2.3.1 Ex. Of Normal Input Processing

The following provides timing diagram related to extraction of Right input value used in program
operation when actual input signal received normally.

%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B)

%IX1.0.0

Right Input
Value
(%IX2.0.0) Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A) Detection Diagram of Right Input Value from Normal Input Signal

%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B)

%IX1.0.0

Right Input
Value
(%IX2.0.0) Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

B) Right Input Value Detection according to input filter when signal delay occurred

%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B)

%IX1.0.0

Right Input
Value
(%IX2.0.0) Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

C) Right Input Value Detection When On/Off delay of input signal occurred in other signal
O: Wrong Input detection X: Wrong Input Release
[Fig. 10.7] Right Input Value Detection

10-6
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

• Operation Description of Fig. A)


If three input signals input normally without delay and input data refresh run at dashed point every
input, data of input image area %2X2.0.0 will have the same Right input value as shown in the
figure.
• Operation Description of Fig. B)
Timing diagram of B) shows that three signals input with time delay due to filter delay and etc. In
the first scan, three input values become 0 and Right input value be 0. In scan 2, two
inputs(%IX2.0.0(A), %IX2.0.0(B)) will be 1, Right input value changed to 1 and remaining input
0(%IX1.0.0)be indicated as ‘Wrong Input’.
In Scan 3, three inputs will be 1, right input values be kept at 1, and ‘Wrong Input’ indication
released as changed to right input value, e.g. 1.
In Scan 4 and 5, there is no change in signal and right input value has been changed to 0 in Scan 6,
when input (%IX1.0.0) remained as 1, it will be indicated ‘wrong input’.
In Scan 7, as the input indicated as ‘wrong input’ changed as right input value, e.g. 0, ‘wrong input
indication’ will be released.

10.2.3.2 Ex. Of Fault Input Processing

The following shows timing diagram related to extract of right input and detection of error used in
program operation when a partial fault of input occurred.
Wrong input is detected in input refresh and released every 20ms. Perform troubleshooting to
determine if error detection setting time exceeded or not at scan END every 20ms.
The contacts detected as a fault will be displayed with _RIQ_A_ERR[n], _RIQ_B_ERR[n],
_RIQ_C_ERR[n] and verified in ‘I/O Error Detailed Information’ menu of GMWIN.

%IX2.0.0(A) 20ms

%IX2.0.0(B) Fault Detection


F

%IX1.0.0

Right Input
Value
(%IX2.0.0) Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A) Permanent Fault 0 of input signal

20ms
20ms
%IX2.0.0(A)

%IX2.0.0(B)
%IX1.0.0 F

Fault Detection

Right
정입력값Input
Value
(%IX2.0.0)
(%IX2.0.0) Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

B) Permanent Fault 1 of input


i l

10-7
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

%IX2.0.0(A)
20ms
%IX2.0.0(B)
F

%IX1.0.0 Fault Detection

Right Input
정입력값
Value
(%IX2.0.0)
(%IX2.0.0)
Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

C) Permanent Fault 1 of Input Signal During Operation(0


Return Disabled)

%IX2.0.0(A)
Fault Detection

%IX2.0.0(B) F
20ms

%IX1.0.0

Right
정입력값Input
Value
(%IX2.0.0)
(%IX2.0.0) Input Scan : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D) Permanent Fault 0 of Input Signal During Operation(1
Return Disabled)
O : Wrong Input Detection X : Wrong Input Release
F : Fault Input Detection N : Wrong Input Not Detected

[Fig. 10.8] Detection Diagram of Fault Input

(1) Permanent 0 Fault of Input Signal


Timing Diagram A) shows when one(%IX1.0.0) of three inputs is permanent fault 0 and the others
operate normally.

In Scan 2, the input rather than right input(%IX2.0.2(A)) is indicated as ‘Wrong Input’, but released
from wrong input because two inputs being 1 after 20ms.

In Scan 3, two inputs set at 1, so right input value changed to 1 and 0 inputIX1.0.0) indicated as ‘wrong input’.
This contact will be detected as a fault in scan 5 because it exceeded fault detection setting time without
‘wrong input’ released. %1X1.0.0 Fault Mark continues.

From Scan 5, exclude fault contact and determine right input value using the other two inputs. To
improve safety in this process, right input value will be set to 0 if any two signals excepting faulty
input being 0.

(2) Permanent 1 Fault of Input Signal


Timing Diagram B) shows when one(%IX1.0.0) of three inputs is permanent fault 1 and the others
operate normally.

10-8
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

In Scan 2, right input value changed to 1 and input(%1X1.0.0) remained as 0 indicated as ‘wrong
input’, but released from wrong input after 20ms.
In Scan 4, input(%1X2.0.0(A)) indicated as wrong input will be released from wrong input after
20ms.
In Scan 5, input(%1X1.0.0) indicated as wrong input will be detected as a fault because not being
normalized within fault detection setting time.

(3) Permanent 1 Fault of Input Signal During Operation


Timing Diagram C) shows when one(%IX1.0.0) of three inputs is permanent fault 1 and the others
operate normally.

‘Wrong Input’ signal of scan 2 will be soon returned and input circuit of %1X1.0.0 between scan 3
and 6 can cause Permanent 1 fault due to switch contact fusion and etc., which can be detected as
wrong input in scan 6 and then as a fault after fault detection setting time. ‘Fault Mark’ of 1%IX1.0.0
will be continued.

(4) Permanent 0 Fault of Input Signal During Operation


Timing Diagram D) shows when one(%IX2.0.0(B)) of three inputs is permanent fault 0 and the
others operate normally.
Permanent Fault 0 will be occurred between scan 2 and 3, which can be detected as wrong input in
scan 3 and then as a fault after fault detection setting time.

As above mentioned, wrong data will not be occurred in right input value in the middle of fault and right
input value be 1 only when the remained two signals are 1 for safety from fault detection.

10-9
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

10.2.4 Detailed Output Data Processing


This flow chart provides detailed information for ‘output image area refresh’ as shown in Fig. 10.5. This
describes comparison of operation result output data, output from 2 output points, fault detection of
output, and auto shutoff of output when faults occurred.

Output Data Processing


Start
1)
CPU A.B compare each output
data and verify if matched with.

2)
Read output data through
feedback input module and check
output contact for disabnormal.

3)
Turn off output power and mark the
fault when fault contact found.
4)
Output data in output module of
base connected to each.
5)
Save new output value in memory.

Scan Program Entry

[Fig. 10.9] Output Refresh Flow Chart

(1) Match of Output Data


During redundant operation, compare output data operated in two CPU modules and check if
matched with operation result after a completion of scan. In case of different operation result, find the
cause and if cause not determined, output it as master data. This time, standby CPU module should
be restarted to match with inner data because of having different data in inner data and resulting in
wrong results even in continuous operation.

(2) Detection of Fault Contact


Each CPU module detects a fault if reading feedback input through input module and after setting
time, previous output data not provided with feedback.

Remarks

• If output change time by user’s program being shorter than the sum of signal delay time between
output and input modules, it can cause wrong fault detection.

(3) Output Off


In case of faulty module and abnormal line, CPU module is not able to control abnormal output
through output module, which cause a fault, so turn off main power. Then CPU module turns off the
power of load by turning OFF master control output contact at parameter designated in user’s
program if fault contact detected.

10-10
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

(4) Data Output into Output Module


For output module without error, each CPU module outputs data into output module attached to it.
Output of switched base will be output by master CPU module.

(5) Save of Output Value


To detect fault through feedback input, save output data in memory.

10.2.5 Ex. Of Output Data Processing


• Ex. Of Normal Output
The following figure shows timing diagram when output signal driven normally. Output signal is
feedback to input and feedback time set to 50ms with Power Off Contact designated.

%QX2.4.0(A) Td1 Td2


%QX2.4.0(A)
%QX2.4.0(B)
%QX2.4.0(B)
%IX2.5.0(A) Td3 Td4
%IX2.5.0(A)
%IX2.5.0(B)
%IX2.5.0(B)
%QX2.2.0(A) T0
%QX2.2.0(A)
%QX2.2.1(B)
%QX2.2.0(B)
Output 출 Scan
력 스캔: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

[Fig. 10.10] Feedback Data Detection of Normal Output Signal

The above timing diagram shows that two output signals output the same signal
(%QX2.4.0(A), %QX2.4.0(B)) through each output module of redundant output base, feedback
output signal(%IX2.5.0(A), %IX2.5.0(B)) through input module of each base, and if error detected,
main power turned off by master control output (%QX2.2.0(A), %QX2.2.1(B)) operation. For
module configuration and connection, see ’10.2 Digital Output Redundancy’.)

CPU module starts (T0) operation with Master Control Output(%QX2.2.0(A), %QX2.2.1(B)) set to
ON after power supply and self diagnosis. Whenever one time operation completed, output
operation results at output module. Output data of output module will be output to outside after
delay time (Td1,Td2) of output element. Output signal can be received to CPU Module after filter
delay time of feedback input module. Then, CPU module checks feedback data after constant
delay time(Td3,Td4).

In the above figure, if assumed to output delay 5ms and input delay 10ms, Td3, Td4 becomes
15ms and output signal will be feedback within time delay(Td3, Td4) shorter than setting feedback
time 50ms. CPU module checks if there are no errors in output and continues operation with
master control output ON.

Remarks

• If feedback time set to 10ms shorter than signal delay time in the above system, CPU may monitor
feedback data until 10ms and determine it as a fault.

10-11
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

• Ex. Of Fault Output Processing


The following shows the timing diagram for faulty output detection. Output signal will be feedback
to input and feedback time set to 50ms with Power Off Contact designated.

Permanent 1 Fault Detection

%QX2.4.0(A) Td1 Td2


%QX2.4.0(A)
%QX2.4.0(B)
%QX2.4.0(B)
%IX2.5.0(A) Td3 Td4
%IX2.5.0(A)
%IX2.5.0(B)
%IX2.5.0(B) 50ms

%QX2.2.0(A) T0
%QX2.2.0(A)
%QX2.2.1(B)
%QX2.2.0(B)
Output
출력 scan
스캔: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

[Fig. 10.11] Timing Diagram of Permanent 1 Fault Output Detection

The configuration and connection of each signal is as described in ‘Ex. Of Normal Output
Processing’.

When faults occurred with Permanent 1 in %QX2.4.0(B) output, %QX2.4.0(A) is feedback with 0
after Td4, but %QX2.4.0(B) not returned to 0 and determined as a fault by feedback input
(%IX2.5.0(B)) check of CPU module after 50ms of setting time. Then, master control output
(%QX2.2.1(B)) controlling main load power of applicable output will be shutoff automatically and
displayed in Fault Flag.

This time load is driven normally with A side output and system continues operation. When
Permanent 1 Fault occurred, time setting can cause wrong output as feedback setting time.

Permanent 0 Fault Detection

%QX2.4.0(A) Td1 Td2


%QX2.4.0(A)
%QX2.4.0(B)
%QX2.4.0(B)
%IX2.5.0(A) Td3 Td4
%IX2.5.0(A)
%IX2.5.0(B) 50ms
%IX2.5.0(B)
%QX2.2.0(A)
%QX2.2.0(A)
T0

%QX2.2.1(B)
%QX2.2.0(B)

Output scan
출력 스캔: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

[Fig. 10.12] Timing Diagram of Permanent 0 Fault Output Detection

The configuration and connection of each signal is as described in ‘Ex. Of Normal Output
Processing’.

10-12
Chapter 10. Input Triplexing, Output Redundancy

When faults occurred with Permanent 0 in %QX2.4.0(B) output, %QX2.4.0(A) is feedback with 1
after Td3, but %QX2.4.0(B) not returned to 1 and determined as a fault by feedback input
(%IX2.5.0(B)) check of CPU module after 50ms of setting time. Then, master control output
(%QX2.2.1(B)) controlling main load power of applicable output will be shutoff automatically and
displayed in Fault Flag.

This time load is driven normally with A side output and system continues operation. When
Permanent 0 Fault occurred, wrong output will not be occurred.

10-13
Chapter 11. Flag Table

Chapter 11. Flag Table

11.1 User Flag

Write
Key Word Type Content Description
Enable
As operation error latch flag in the unit of program
Operation Error block(PB), error occurred during programming will be kept
_LER BOOL Enable
Latch Flag until the end of program block. Can be deleted by
program.
As operation error flag in the unit of operation
Operation Error
_ERR BOOL Enable function(FN) or function block(FB), updated whenever
Flag
operation run.
_T20MS * BOOL 20ms Clock Available in user program and toggled ON/OFF in half
_T100MS * BOOL 100ms Clock period. As proceeding signal toggle after a completion of
scan, clock signal can be delayed or distorted according
_T200MS * BOOL 200ms Clock to programming time. Use clock sufficient longer than
_T1S * BOOL 1 sec. Clock scan time.
_T2S * BOOL 2 sec. Clock Clock signal starts at OFF when initialization program and
_T10S * BOOL 10 sec. Clock scan program started.

_T20S * BOOL 20 sec. Clock


y _T100MS Ex. Of Clock 50ms 50ms
_T60S * BOOL 60 sec. Clock

_ON * BOOL Firm ON Firm ON flag available in user programming


_OFF * BOOL Firm OFF Firm OFF flag available in user programming
_1ON * BOOL First Scan ON ON only during first scan after operation started.
_1OFF * BOOL First Scan OFF OFF only during first scan after operation started
ON/OFF toggle flag in every scan when programming
_STOG * BOOL Scan toggle
user program.
If set this flag in initialization program prepared by users,
Initial Program stop running initialization programming and start scan
_INIT_DONE BOOL Enable
Completed program. (See 11.6 ‘_INIT_RUN’ of system operation
status information flag)
Current Data of
_RTC_DATE DATE Standard Date Data on the basis of Jan. 1, 1984
RTC
Current Time of
_RTC_TOD TOD Time data a day on the basis of 00:00:00 , unit of msec
RTC
Current Date of Data representing day of week(0:Mon, 1:Tues, 2:Wed,
_RTC_WEEK UINT
RTC 3:Thurs, 4:Fri, 5:Sat, 6:Sun)

Remarks

* Initialized when running initialization programming and after a completion of initialization programming
1) Initialized(Cold, Warm) when starting scan programming
2) Returned(Hot) to the previous state before stop when starting scan programming
* To match with operation data in redundant, copy the value of master into standby at scan END in case of
‘_T20MS ~ _STOG’, ‘_RTC_DATE ~ _RTC_WEEK’.

11-1
Chapter 11. Flag Table

11.2 System Error Flag

„ Redundant System Error Flag


BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
position
Represe- System
_CNF_ER WORD ntative error(Heavy Related to operation stop of redundant system.
Key word Fault)
Errors occurred in CPU A or CPU B during redundant
operation are displayed in error representative
CPU flag(_CPU_A__ER, _CPU_B_ER) and CPU error
_CPU_ER BOOL BIT 0 Configuration occurred stops operation. Errors occurred while operating
error in single master are displayed simultaneously in CPU flag
and this flag. (For details, see _SYS_ERR and S 002 ~
S116 of Chat. 13)
Errors occurred in CPU A or CPU B during redundant
operation are displayed in error representative flag and
Module type CPU error occurred stops operation. Errors occurred
_IO_TYER BOOL BIT 1
mismatch error while operating in single master are displayed
simultaneously in CPU flag and this flag. (See
_IO_A_TYER, _IO_B_TYER)
Module Displayed when CPU A and CPU B found configuration
_IO_DEER BOOL BIT 2 Mount/Dismount error in I/O module at the same address. (See
Error _IO_A_DEER, _IO_B_DEER)
FUSE Displayed when CPU A and CPU B found errors of fuse in
_FUSE_ER BOOL BIT 3 Disconnection I/O module at the same address. (See _FUSE_A_ER,
Error _FUSE_B_ER)
I/O module Displayed when CPU A and CPU B found errors of
_IO_RWER BOOL BIT 4 Read/Write Read/Write in I/O module at the same address. (See
Error(Failure) _IO_A_RWER, _IO_B_RWER)
Special/Communi
Displayed when CPU A and CPU B found errors of
cation Module
_SP_IFER BOOL BIT 5 Special/Communication Module at the same address.
Interface
(See _SP_A_IFER, _SP_B_IFER)
Error(Failure)
Heavy Fault
Detection Error of Displayed if detecting heavy fault of external equipment
_ANNUN_ER BOOL BIT 6
External by user program and writing in _ANC_ERR[n].
Equipment
Displayed if failed to participate in redundant operation
Standby Entry
BIT 7 and only in CPU tried to entry standby. Occurred when
Error
failed in operation synchronization between CPU.
Scan Watchdog
_WD_ER BOOL BIT 8 Errors occurred in CPU A or CPU B during redundant
Error
operation are displayed in error representative flag and
Program Code CPU error occurred stops operation. Errors occurred
_CODE_ER BOOL BIT 9
Error while operating in single master are displayed
_STACK_ER BOOL BIT 10 Stack Over Error simultaneously in CPU flag and this flag. (See
_CNF_A_ER, _CNF_B_ER )
_P_BCK_ER BOOL BIT 11 Program Error
Displayed when normal I/O disabled due to a failure of all
_RIQ_ER BOOL BIT 14 I/O contact Error contacts of multi I/O in redundant system
(See RIQ_ERR[n] )

11-2
Chapter 11. Flag Table

„ A CPU System Error Flag


BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
position
Repre-
A CPU System
_CNF_A_ER WORD sentative Error occurred in A CPU system.
error
key word

Occurred when normal operation disabled in CPU


A CPU
module due to errors of CPU mounting position of base,
_CPU_A_ER BOOL BIT 0 Configuration
redundant composition and etc. (For details, see
Error
_SYS_ERR and S 002~S 116 of Chap. 13)

Displayed if the configuration different between I/O


A CPU System
configuration parameter and actual module mounted at A
_IO_A_TYER BOOL BIT 1 Module Type
CPU system or if specific module mounted at disavailable
Mismatch Error
slot in starting. (See _IO_A_TYER_N, _IO_A_TYERR[n] )

A CPU System
Displayed if module configuration changed in base,
Module
_IO_A_DEER BOOL BIT 2 controlled by A CPU system. (See _IO_A_DEER_N,
Mount/Dismount
_IO_A_DEERR[n] )
Error
A CPU System
Displayed if fuse of output module disconnected in base,
FUSE
_FUSE_A_ER BOOL BIT 3 controlled by A CPU system, during operation. (See
Disconnection
_FUSE_A_ER_N, _FUSE_A_ERR[n])
Error

A CPU System Displayed if write/read errors of I/O module occurred in


_IO_A_RWER BOOL BIT 4 Read/Write base, controlled by A CPU system, during operation.
Error(Failure) (See _I O_A__RWER_N, _IO_A_RWERR[n])

A CPU System
Displayed if normal interface disabled due to initialization
Special/Communi
failure or misoperation of special or communication
_SP_A_IFER BOOL BIT 5 cation Module
module in base, controlled by A CPU system. (See
Interface
_SP_A_IFER_N, _SP_A_IFERR[n])
Error(Failure)
A CPU Standby Displayed if A CPU failed to participate in redundant
BIT 7
Entry Error operation while operating B CPU.

A CPU Scan Displayed if program scan time of A CPU exceeded


_WD_A_ER BOOL BIT 8
Watchdog Error SCAN WATCH DOG TIME designated by parameter.

A CPU Program Displayed when A CPU encountered indecipherable


_CODE_A_ER BOOL BIT 9
Error command while running user programming.
_STACK_A_ A CPU Stack Displayed when A CPU exceeded normal range of
BOOL BIT 10
ER Over Error program stack during programming.

Displayed if A CPU program memory broken or


_P_A_BCK_ A CPU Program
BOOL BIT 11 programming disabled due to program error. (See
ER Error
_DOMAIN_A_ST)

11-3
Chapter 11. Flag Table

„ B CPU System Error Flag

BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
position
Represe-
B CPU System
_CNF_B_ER WORD ntative Error occurred in B CPU system.
error
key word
Occurred when normal operation disabled in CPU
B CPU module due to B CPU self diagnostic error, errors of CPU
_CPU_B_ER BOOL BIT 0 Configuration mounting position of base, redundant composition and
Error etc. (For details, see _SYS_ERR and S 002~S 116 of
Chap. 13)

Displayed if the configuration different between I/O


B CPU System
configuration parameter and actual module mounted at B
_IO_B_TYER BOOL BIT 1 Module Type
CPU system or if specific module mounted at disavailable
Mismatch Error
slot in starting. (See _IO_B_TYER_N, _IO_B_TYERR[n] )

B CPU System
Displayed if module configuration changed in base,
Module
_IO_B_DEER BOOL BIT 2 controlled by A CPU system. (See _IO_B_DEER_N,
Mount/Dismount
_IO_B_DEERR[n] )
Error
B CPU System
Displayed if fuse of output module disconnected in base,
FUSE
_FUSE_B_ER BOOL BIT 3 controlled by A BPU system, during operation. (See
Disconnection
_FUSE_B_ER_N, _FUSE_B_ERR[n])
Error

B CPU System Displayed if write/read errors of I/O module occurred in


_IO_B_RWER BOOL BIT 4 Read/Write base, controlled by B CPU system, during operation.
Error(Failure) (See _I O_B__RWER_N, _IO_B_RWERR[n])

B CPU System
Displayed if normal interface disabled due to initialization
Special/Communi
failure or misoperation of special or communication
_SP_B_IFER BOOL BIT 5 cation Module
module in base, controlled by B CPU system. (See
Interface
_SP_B_IFER_N, _SP_B_IFERR[n])
Error(Failure)

B CPU Standby Displayed if B CPU failed to participate in redundant


BIT 7
Entry Error operation while operating A CPU.

B CPU Scan Displayed if program scan time of B CPU exceeded


_WD_B_ER BOOL BIT 8
Watchdog Error SCAN WATCH DOG TIME designated by parameter.

B CPU Program Displayed when B CPU encountered indecipherable


_CODE_B_ER BOOL BIT 9
Error command while running user programming.

_STACK_B_ A CPU Stack Displayed when B CPU exceeded normal range of


BOOL BIT 10
ER Over Error program stack during programming.

Displayed if B CPU program memory broken or


_P_B_BCK_ B CPU System
BOOL BIT 11 programming disabled due to program error. (See
ER error
_DOMAIN_B_ST)

11-4
Chapter 11. Flag Table

11.3 System Fault Mask Flag

„ Fault Mask Flag(Write Enabled)

BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
position
Represe- Continue operation
_CNF_ER_M BYTE ntative in system Continue operation when errors occurred
key word error(heavy fault)
Continue operation Detection of heavy fault from external equipment, e.g. when
_ANNUN_ER
BOOL BIT 6 when user error overriding and continuing to operation when _ANNUN_ER
_M
detected occurred.
Continue operation
If all multi I/O contacts(A, B toggle) failed during redundant
_RIQ_ER_M BOOL BIT 14 when I/O contacts
operation, to override and continue operation.
detected

„ Module Fault Mask Flag(Write Enabled

Key word Type Range Content Description


Use if overriding and continuing operation when errors occurred
in the base or module attached to during operation.
Setting in the
BOOL Set the position of base to be masked.
_BASE_M[n] n:0~15 unit of base
ARRAY
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
_BASE_M[n]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Use if overriding and continuing operation when errors occurred


in the mounted module during operation.
Set the position of slot to be masked.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BYTE Setting in the
_SLOT_M[n] n:0~15 _SLOT_M[0] 베이스
Base0 0
ARRAY unit of slot
_SLOT_M[1] 베이스
Base1 1

_SLOT_M[15] Base1515
베이스

11-5
Chapter 11. Flag Table

„ Module Skip Flag(Write Enabled)

Key word Type Range Content Description

Used to exclude specific extension base from A CPU operation. If


A CPU Base setting flag, CPU stops access to the extension base. Used when
_BASE_A_ BOOL replacing extension base, power and module during operation.
n:0~15 Skip
S[n] ARRAY
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
_BASE_A_S[n]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Used to exclude specific extension base from A CPU operation. If


setting flag, CPU stops access to the extension base. Used when
replacing module of extension base during operation.

_SLOT_A_S BYTE A CPU Slot


n:0~15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[n] ARRAY Skip _SLOT_A_S[0] 베이스
Base0 0
_SLOT_A_S[1] 베이스
Base1 1

_SLOT_A_S[15] Base1515
베이스

Used to exclude specific extension base from B CPU operation. If


setting flag, CPU stops access to the extension base. Used when
_BASE_B_ BOOL B CPU Base replacing extension base, power and module during operation.
n:0~15
S[n] ARRAY Skip

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
_BASE_B_S[n]
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Used to exclude specific extension base from B CPU operation. If


setting flag, CPU stops access to the extension base. Used when
replacing module of extension base during operation.

_SLOT_B_S BYTE B CPU Slot


n:0~15 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[n] ARRAY Skip _SLOT_B_S[0] Base0 0
베이스
_SLOT_B_S[1] Base1 1
베이스

_SLOT_B_S[15] Base1515
베이스

11-6
Chapter 11. Flag Table

11.4 System Warning Flag

BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
Position
Repres-
_CNF_WAR WORD entative System Warning Batch processing of the following warning flags.
key word
_RTC_ERR BOOL BIT 0 RTC Data Error Displayed when RTC data error occurred.
Used in initialization program to indicate if operation data
lost in data memory due to back up error, normal hot or
Data Back up
_D_BCK_ER BOOL BIT 1 warm restart disabled, and cold restart performed.
Error
[Reset automatically after a completion of initialization
program.]
Used in initialization program to indicate if warm or cold
restart performed as parameter because hot restart time
Hot Restart exceeded to recover power during programming and
_H_BCK_ER BOOL BIT 2
Disable Arror impossible to back up operation data necessary in hot
restart. [Reset automatically after a completion of
initialization program.]
Displayed if cold restart performed because operation
unable to be recovered in power on after program
stopped due to power off during operation. Used in
ABNORMAL initialization program to alert continuous operation not
_AB_SD_ER BOOL BIT 3
SHUTDOWN performed to retain data. [Reset automatically after a
completion of initialization program.]
Also displayed If program stopped by 'ESTOP' function.
Task
Indicates task collision if redundant operation required
Collision(Positive
_TASK_ERR BOOL BIT 4 when running user program. (For details, see
period, outside
_TC_BMAP[n], _TC_CNT[n])
task)
Displayed when battery voltage for user program and
_BAT_ERR BOOL BIT 5 Battery Error
data memory back up below the specified.
Light Fault
Detected of If light fault detected from external equipment by user
_ANNUN_WR BOOL BIT 6
External program and recorded in _ANC_WB[n].
Equipment
Displayed when power supply not normalized in
_E_PWR_ER BOOL BIT 7 Base Power Error extension base of A CPU or B CPU when power on. (See
_CNF_AB_WAR)
Highway Link
_HSPMT1_ER BOOL BIT 8
Parameter 1 Error
Highway Link
_HSPMT2_ER BOOL BIT 9 Displayed when checking parameter error of each
Parameter 2 Error
highway link and notifying its operation disabled.
Highway Link
_HSPMT3_ER BOOL BIT 10 Reset in highway link disabled(stop)
Parameter 3 Error
Highway Link
_HSPMT4_ER BOOL BIT 11
Parameter 4 Error
Displayed when network or cable redundant composed
Network, Cable
_FDNET_WR BOOL BIT 12 wrong or disconnected in redundant network
redundant Error
configuration.

11-7
Chapter 11. Flag Table

BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
Position
Indicates partial fault when errors occurred in any I/O
_RIQ_WR BOOL BIT 14 Contact Failure contacts(A, B, C) of redundant system but operated
through normal contacts.
Redundant Power
Displayed when errors occurred in one of two powers if
_E_RPWR_WR BOOL BIT 15 Error of Extension
applying power redundant base to extension base.
Base

BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
Position
Represe
_CNF_AB_WAR WORD ntative System Warning Detailed warning flag of CPU A, CPU B
Key word
A CPU of RTC
_RTC_A_ERR BOOL BIT 0 Indicates RTC data error of A CPU.
error
B CPU of RTC
_RTC_B_ERR BOOL BIT 1 Indicates RTC data error of B CPU.
error
Used in initialization program to indicate if operation data
lost in data memory due to back up error of A CPU,
A CPU of data normal hot or warm restart disabled, and cold restart
_D_A_BCK_ER BOOL BIT 2 performed.
BACK_UP error
Reset automatically after a completion of initialization
program.
Used in initialization program to indicate if operation data
lost in data memory due to back up error of B CPU,
B CPU of data normal hot or warm restart disabled, and cold restart
_D_B_BCK_ER BOOL BIT 3
BACK_UP error performed.
Reset automatically after a completion of initialization
program.
A CPU of battery Displayed when battery voltage below the specified for A
_BAT_A_ERR BOOL BIT 4
error CPU user program and data memory back up.
B CPU of battery Displayed when battery voltage below the specified for B
_BAT_B_ERR BOOL BIT 5
error CPU user program and data memory back up.
A CPU of Displayed if power of extension base not normalized yet
_E_A_PWR_ER BOOL BIT 6 extension base of when power on of A CPU. CPU waits for power
power error normalization in standby.
B CPU of
Displayed if power of extension base not normalized yet
extension
_E_B_PWR_ER BOOL BIT 7 when power on of B CPU. CPU waits for power
Base of power normalization in standby.
error

11-8
Chapter 11. Flag Table

11.5 System Error and Warning Details Flag

Key word Type Range Content Description


Module Type If mounted with module different from that in I/O configuration
_IO_A_TYER Mismatch Slot parameter in A CPU system or specific module mounted to
UINT 0~127
_N Number of A disavailable slot when started. Detect this and record the lowest
CPU system slot number.
If mounted with module different from that in I/O configuration
Base
parameter in A CPU system or specific module mounted to
disavailable slot when started. Detect this and record slot position
Module Type at Bit-MAP of base.
_IO_A_TYER BYTE Mismatch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n:0~15
R[n] ARRAY Position of A _IO_A_TYERR[0] 베이스
Base0 0
CPU system _IO_A_TYERR[1] Base1 1
베이스

_IO_A_TYERR[15] Base1515
베이스

Module Type If mounted with module different from that in I/O configuration
_IO_B_TYER Mismatch Slot parameter in B CPU system or specific module mounted to
UINT 0~127
_N Number of B disavailable slot when started. Detect this and record the lowest
CPU system slot number.
If mounted with module different from that in I/O configuration
parameter in B CPU system or specific module mounted to
disavailable slot when started. Detect this and record slot position
Module Type at Bit-MAP of base.
_IO_B_TYER BYTE Mismatch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n:0~15
R[n] ARRAY Position of B _IO_B_TYERR[0] 베이스
Base00
CPU system _IO_B_TYERR[1] 베이스
Base11

_IO_B_TYERR[15] Base1515
베이스

Module
Mount/Dismou While operating, if module configuration changed in the base
_IO_A_DEER
UINT 0~127 nt Slot controlled by A CPU system, e.g. if module mount/dismount error
_N
Number of A occurred. Detect slot error and record the lowest slot number.
CPU System
While operating, if module configuration changed in the base
controlled by A CPU system, e.g. if module mount/dismount error
occurred. Detect slot error and record slot position at Bit-MAP of
Module base.
Mount/Dismou
_IO_A_DEER BYTE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n:0~15 nt Position of
R[n] ARRAY _IO_A_DEERR[0] Base00
베이스
A CPU Base11
_IO_A_DEERR[1] 베이스
System
_IO_A_DEERR[15] Base1515
베이스

Module
Mount/Dismou While operating, if module configuration changed in the base
_IO_B_DEER
UINT 0~127 nt Slot controlled by B CPU system, e.g. if module mount/dismount error
_N
Number of B occurred. Detect slot error and record the lowest slot number.
CPU System

11-9
Chapter 11. Flag Table

Key word Type Range Content Description


While operating, if module configuration changed in the base
controlled by B CPU system, e.g. if module mount/dismount error
occurred. Detect slot error and record slot position at Bit-MAP of
Module base.
Mount/Dismou
_IO_B_DEER BYTE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n:0~15 nt Position of
R[n] ARRAY _IO_B_DEERR[0] 베이스
Base00
B CPU _IO_B_DEERR[1] Base11
베이스
System
_IO_B_DEERR[15] Base1515
베이스

FUSE
While operating, if fuse disconnected of output module in the
_FUSE_A_E disconnection
UINT 0~127 base controlled by A CPU system. Detect if fuse disconnected
R_N slot number of
and record the lowest slot number.
A CPU system
While operating, if fuse disconnected of output module in the
base controlled by A CPU system. Detect if fuse disconnected
and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.
FUSE
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
_FUSE_A_E BYTE disconnection
n:0~15 _FUSE_A_ERR[0] Base0 0
베이스
RR[n] ARRAY slot position of
_FUSE_A_ERR[1] Base1 1
베이스
A CPU system
_FUSE_A_ERR[15] Base1515
베이스

FUSE
While operating, if fuse disconnected of output module in the
_FUSE_B_E disconnection
UINT 0~127 base controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors
R_N slot number of
detected and record the lowest slot number.
B CPU system
While operating, if fuse disconnected of output module in the
base controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors
detected and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.
FUSE
_FUSE_B_E BYTE disconnection 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n:0~15 _FUSE_B_ERR[0] Base0 0
베이스
RR[n] ARRAY slot position of
_FUSE_B_ERR[1] Base1 1
베이스
B CPU system
_FUSE_B_ERR[15] Base1515
베이스

I/O Module
Read/Write While operating, if Read/Write error occurred of I/O module in the
_IO_A_RWE
UINT 0~127 Error Slot base controlled by A CPU system. Detect slot position errors
R_N
Number of A detected and record the lowest slot number.
CPU System

While operating, if Read/Write error occurred of I/O module in the


base controlled by A CPU system. Detect slot position errors
I/O Module
detected and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.
Read/Write
_IO_A_RWE BYTE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n:0~15 Error Slot Base0 0
RR[n] ARRAY _IO_A_RWERR[0] 베이스
Position of A _IO_A_RWERR[1] Base1
베이스 1
CPU System
_IO_A_RWERR[15]
Base 15
베이스 15

11-10
Chapter 11. Flag Table

Key word Type Range Content Description


I/O Module
Read/Write While operating, if Read/Write error occurred of I/O module in the
_IO_B_RWE
UINT 0~127 Error Slot base controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors
R_N
Number of B detected and record the lowest slot number.
CPU System
While operating, if Read/Write error occurred of I/O module in the
base controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors
I/O Module detected and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.
Read/Write
_IO_B_RWE BYTE 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
n:0~15 Error Slot
RR[n] ARRAY _IO_B_RWERR[0] Base0 0
베이스
Position of B Base1 1
_IO_B_RWERR[1] 베이스
CPU System
_IO_B_RWERR[15]
Base 15
베이스 15

Special/Comm
unication
When an error occurred if special or communication module
Module
_SP_A_IFER failed in initialization or due to misoperation of module in the base
UINT 0~127 Interface Error
_N controlled by A CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected
Slot Number
and record the lowest slot number.
of A CPU
System
When an error occurred if special or communication module
Special/Comm failed in initialization or due to misoperation of module in the base
unication controlled by A CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected
Module and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.
_SP_A_IFER BYTE n:
Interface Error 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
R[n] ARRAY 0~15 _SP_A_IFERR[0] Base0 0
베이스
Slot Position
_SP_A_IFERR[1] Base1 1
베이스
of A CPU
System Base 15
_SP_A_IFERR[15] 베이스 15

Special/Comm
unication
When an error occurred if special or communication module
Module
_SP_B_IFER failed in initialization or due to misoperation of module in the base
UINT 0~127 Interface Error
_N controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected
Slot Number
and record the lowest slot number
of B CPU
System
When an error occurred if special or communication module
Special/Comm failed in initialization or due to misoperation of module in the base
unication controlled by B CPU system. Detect slot position errors detected
Module and record slot position at Bit-MAP of base.
_SP_B_IFER BYTE n: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Interface Error
R[n] ARRAY 0~15 _SP_B_IFERR[0] 베이스
Base0 0
Slot Position
_SP_B_IFERR[1] Base1 1
베이스
of B CPU
System Base 15
_SP_B_IFERR[15] 베이스 15

Fault
Where detected and recorded heavy fault from external
_ANC_ERR n: Detection from
UINT equipment by user program and the number to be identified with
[n] ∗1 0~15 External
error type recorded at each 16-point( 0 disavailable).
Equipment

11-11
Chapter 11. Flag Table

Key word Type Range Content Description


Fault
If warning displayed in _ANC_WB[n] by user program, BIT
_ANC_WAR Detection from
UINT n: 0~7 position indicated in digit sequentially from _ANC_WAR[0] (n=0,
[n] ∗1 External
the latest data)
Equipment
Detect light fault from external equipment by user program and
Fault record at Bit-MAP. (0 disavailable)
Detection BIT
_ANC_WB[n] BOOL n:0~51 _ANC_WB[n]: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
map from
∗1 ARRAY 1
External
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8

Equipment
511 510 509 508 507 506 505 504

TASK Detected and displayed with bitmap when the same task running
COLLISION by each task or ‘task collision’ occurred in standby state.
Bit_Map _TC_BMAP[n]: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
_TC_BMAP BOOL 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
n:0~47 Positive: 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
[n] ∗1 ARRAY
n:0~31 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24
Outside: 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32
47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40
n:32~47

_TC_CNT[n] TASK
While running user program, detect when task collision occurred
UINT n:0~47 COLLISION
∗1 by each task and record task collision number(n; task number)
COUNTER
Battery
_BAT_A_ER DATE& Voltage Drop Record the time first detected battery voltage drop of A CPU.
_TM TIME Time of A Reset if battery voltage returned to normal.
CPU
Battery
_BAT_B_ER DATE& Voltage Drop Record the time first detected battery voltage drop of B CPU.
_TM TIME Time of B Reset if battery voltage returned to normal.
CPU
Count the occurred number of instantaneous power failure in Run
_AC_F_CNT 0~ AC FAIL
UINT mode. That is, count all of instantaneous power failures in A
∗1 65535 Count
CPU, B CPU, and Extension Base.
DATE& Instantaneous Retained with the time instantaneous power failure occurred on
_AC_F_TM[n
TIME n:0~15 Power Failure the basis of the latest up to 16 in Run Mode. (n=0; the latest
]
ARRAY History data).
Time error occurred, up to 16 on the basis of the latest. (n=0; the
_ERR_HIS[n] BLOCK latest data).
n:0~15 Error History
*2 ARRAY Stop Time : DATE&TIME(8 BYTE)
Error Code : UINT (2 BYTE)
Record operation mode changed time, operation mode, and
_MODE_A_H
restart mode of A CPU system up to 16 on the basis of the
IS Operation
latest((n=0; the latest data).
[n] BLOCK Mode Change
n:0~15 Changed time : DATE&TIME(8 BYTE)
ARRAY History of A
*2 CPU Operation Mode : UINT (2 BYTE)
Restart : UINT (2 BYTE)

11-12
Chapter 11. Flag Table

Key word Type Range Content Description


Record operation mode changed time, operation mode, and
restart mode of B CPU system up to 16 on the basis of the
Operation
latest((n=0; the latest data).
_MODE_B_H BLOCK Mode Change
n:0~15 Changed time : DATE&TIME(8 BYTE)
IS[n] *2 ARRAY History of B
CPU Operation Mode : UINT (2 BYTE)
Restart : UINT (2 BYTE)
Record operation mode changed time, operation mode, and
Operation restart mode of Redundant system up to 16 on the basis of the
Mode Change latest((n=0; the latest data).
_RED_HIS[n] BLOCK
n:0~15 History of Changed Time : DATE&TIME(8 BYTE)
*2 ARRAY
Redundant
Operation Mode : UINT (2 BYTE)
System
Restart : UINT (2 BYTE)
Indicate contact position of fault disabled in normal I/O due to a
Long failure of all multi I/O contacts in redundant system. N; module
n:0~ Fault Contact serial number, a LWORD includes 64-point contact.
_RIQ_ERR[n] WORD
127 Error Details
ARRAY
(Ex.: No. 1 Base, Module of No. 0 Module n=8x1+0=8)
Fault Contact
Long
_RIQ_A_ER n:0~ Warning Indicates the position of faulty contact from multi I/O contacts in A
WORD Details
R[n] *1 127 side.
ARRAY
(A Side)
Fault Contact
Long
_RIQ_B_ER n:0~ Warning Indicates the position of faulty contact from multi I/O contacts in B
WORD Details
R[n] *1 127 side.
ARRAY
(B Side)

Long Fault Contact


_RIQ_C_ER n:0~ Warning Indicates the position of faulty contact from multi I/O contacts in
WORD
R[n] *1 127 Details (Switch switched base.
ARRAY Side)

*1 Flag monitoring or program write enable flag


*2 does not provide users with flag directly. Check the content in applicable menu of GMWIN.

11-13
Chapter 11. Flag Table

11.6 System Operation Status Information Flag

BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
Position
CPU Type Identification No. – GMR-CPUA:16(0), GMR-
_CPU_TYPE UINT 0~255 System Type CPUB:15
Reference: GM1-CPUA:0, GM2-CPUA:1, GM3-CPUA:2
O/S Version No. of
_VER_A_NUM UINT O/S version number of A CPU module
A CPU
O/S Version No. of
_VER_B_NUM UINT O/S version number of B CPU module
B CPU
Memory Module Type of program memory module mounted at A CPU
_MEM_A_TYPE UINT 1~5
Type of A CPU (0:Not mounted, Type:1~5)

Memory Module Type of program memory module mounted at B CPU


_MEM_B_TYPE UINT 1~5
Type of B CPU (0:Not mounted, Type:1~5)
Mode and
Status Information of mode and operation of A CPU
- Operation of A
system.
CPU
Operation Mode can be changed only by mode key or by
BIT 0 Local Control
GMWIN.
BIT 1 STOP
BIT 2 RUN
Indicates the operation of CPU.
BIT 3 PAUSE(None)
BIT 4 DEBUG
Operation Mode
BIT 5
Change by Key
Change by Local
BIT 6
GMWIN에
Change by Remote Factor changed into current operation mode.
_SYS_A_STATE WORD BIT 7
GMWIN에
Operation Mode
BIT 8 Change by
Communication
STOP by STOP Stopped after a completion of scan by STOP function in
BIT 9
function RUN mode.
BIT 10 Forced Input Running forced On/Off for input contact.
BIT 11 Forced Output Running forced On/Off for output contact.
STOP by ESTOP
BIT 12 Immediately stopped by ESTOP function in Run Mode.
function
There is designated I/O module to stop trouble check and
BIT 13 I/O Skip Running
data refresh.
BIT 14 Monitor Running Running outside monitor for program and variable.
BIT 15 Remote Mode ON Operating in Remote Mode.

11-14
Chapter 11. Flag Table

BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
Position
Mode and Status Information of mode and operation of A CPU
-
Operation of B CPU system.
Operation Mode can be changed only by mode key or by
BIT 0 Local Control
GMWIN.
BIT 1 STOP
BIT 2 RUN
Indicates the operation of CPU.
BIT 3 PAUSE(None)
BIT 4 DEBUG
Operation Mode
BIT 5
Change by Key
Change by Local
BIT 6
GMWIN에
Change by Remote Factor changed into current operation mode.
BIT 7
GMWIN에
_SYS_B_STATE WORD
Operation Mode
BIT 8 Change by
Communication
STOP by STOP Stopped after a completion of scan by STOP function in
BIT 9
function RUN mode.
BIT 10 Forced Input Running forced On/Off for input contact.
BIT 11 Forced Output Running forced On/Off for output contact.
STOP by ESTOP
BIT 12 Immediately stopped by ESTOP function in Run Mode.
function
There is designated I/O module to stop trouble check and
BIT 13 I/O Skip Running
data refresh.
BIT 14 Monitor Running Running outside monitor for program and variable.
BIT 15 Remote Mode ON Operating in Remote Mode.

GMWIN
- Path connected with GMWIN and CPU.
Connection
Local GMWIN
BIT 0 Connected with connector mounted at CPU module.
Connection
_PADT_CNF BYTE Remote GMWIN Connected with connector in communication module of
BIT 1
Connection remote I/O base.
Remote
BIT 2 Communication Connected with communication line and other PLC.
Connection
Restart Mode
-
Information
_RST_TY BYTE BIT 0 Cold Restart
Displayed in restart mode performed to start current
BIT 1 Warm Restart
running program
BIT 2 Hot Restart
_INIT_RUN BOOL BIT 3 Initializing Users are running user’s initialization program.
Max. Scan
_SCAN_MAX*1 UINT Record the max. scan time during operation.
Time(ms)

11-15
Chapter 11. Flag Table

BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
Position
Min. Scan
_SCAN_MIN*1 UINT Record the min. scan time during operation.
Time(ms)
Current Scan Update and record the current scan time during
_SCAN_CUR*1 UINT
Time(ms) operation.
Run time check
_STSK_NUM*1 UINT task Designate the task number to require run time check.
designation
Task Scan
_STSK_MAX*1 UINT Max. value of task run time designated at _STSK_NUM
Time(ms) – Max.
Task Scan
_STSK_MIN*1 UINT Min. value of task run time designated at _STSK_NUM
Time( (ms) – Min.
Task Scan
Current. value of task run time designated at
_STSK_CUR*1 UINT Time( (ms) -
_STSK_NUM
Current
BCD data RTC current time
(Ex. :96-01-01-12-00-00-00-20)
_RTC_TIME[0]: Year, _RTC_TIME[1]: Month,
_RTC_TIME[2] :Day

_RTC_TIME[n] BCD n:0~7 Current Time _RTC_TIME[3]: Hour, _RTC_TIME[4]: Min.,


_RTC_TIME[5] :Sec.
_RTC_TIME[6]: Day of Week _RTC_TIME[7]:
Century(19XX, 20XX)
Day of Week - 0:Mon, 1:Thues, 2:Wed, 3:Thurs, 4:Fri,
5:Sat, 6:Sun
Error
_SYS_ERR UINT Error Type See Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting
Code

*1 : Flag Monitoring or Program Write Enable Flag

„ Redundant Operation Mode Status Information

BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
Position
Redundant
_RED_STATE BYTE - Indicates the operation of redundant system.
Operation
Running
During redundant operation, normal operation of CPU A,
_RUN_RED BOOL BIT_0 Redundant
CPU B
Operation
A Side One-sided
_RUN_SA BOOL BIT_1 Only CPU A operating one-sidedly in redundant system.
Operation
B Side One-sided
_RUN_SB BOOL BIT_2 Only CPU B operating one-sidedly in redundant system.
Operation
A CPU Master
_A_MASTER BOOL BIT_3 CPU A operating as a master in redundant system.
Operation
B CPU Master
_B_MASTER BOOL BIT_4 CPU B operating as a master in redundant system.
Operation

11-16
Chapter 11. Flag Table

11.7 System Configuration Status Information Flag

„ User Program Status Information

BIT
Key Word Type Content Description
Position
SW configuration
- Display errors by block of user program in A CPU system
of A CPU system
Basic Parameter
BIT 0 Check and display errors of basic parameter.
Error
I/O Configuration
BIT 1 Check and display errors of I/O configuration parameter.
_DOMAIN_A_ST BYTE Parameter Error
BIT 2 Program Error Check and display errors of user program.
Access Variable
BIT 3 Check and display errors of access parameter.
Error
High Link
BIT 4 Check and display errors of highway link parameter.
Parameter Error
SW configuration
- Display errors by block of user program in A CPU system
of B CPU system
Basic Parameter
BIT 0 Check and display errors of basic parameter.
Error
I/O Configuration
BIT 1 Check and display errors of I/O configuration parameter.
_DOMAIN_B_ST BYTE Parameter Error
BIT 2 Program Error Check and display errors of user program.
Access Variable
BIT 3 Check and display errors of access parameter.
Error
High Link
BIT 4 Check and display errors of highway link parameter.
Parameter Error

„ Operation Mode Key Status Information

Key BIT
Type Content Description
Word Position
- A CPU Key
Display key switch of A CPU and DIF.
setting position
BIT 0 KEY_STOP
BIT 1 KEY_RUN
Display Mode Key switch setting of A CPU.
BIT 2 KEY_PAUSE/RE
_KEY_A_ MOTE
BYTE
STATE
-
BIT 4 KEY_B
BIT 5 KEY_A Display Key switch of DIF.
BIT 6 KEY_A+B
-

11-17
Chapter 11. Flag Table

Key BIT
Type Content Description
Word Position
Key setting
- position of B Display Key switch of B CPU and DIF.
CPU
BIT 0 KEY_STOP
BIT 1 KEY_RUN
Display Mode Key switch setting of BCPU.
_KEY_B_
BYTE KEY_PAUSE/RE
STATE BIT 2
MOTE
BIT 3 -
BIT 4 KEY_B
BIT 5 KEY_A Display Key switch of DIF.
BIT 6 KEY_A+B
CPU
Configuration
- Display the configuration of CPU modules.
Status
Information
BIT 0 GM1/GM2 Display CPU type. GM1:0, GM2:1, redundancy:0
Multi_CPU
BIT 1 Display when PLC configuration is GM1-Multi CPU.( redundancy:0)
Configuration
Redundant
_CPU_ BIT 2 Display when PLC configuration is GMR-redundancy.
Configuration
WORD
CNF In case of GM1-Multi CPU of PLC configuration, display the
BIT CPU0~3
position of mounted CPU and in case of redundant system, set to
4~7 Mounting
BIT8 in CPU-A and to BIT9 in CPU-B.
CPU Module In case of GM1-Multi CPU of PLC configuration, display the
BIT
Mounting mounted position of its own and in case of redundant system, set
8~11
Position to BIT8 in CPU-A and to BIT9 in CPU-B.
Matched with
BIT If resource built-in CPU module installed in right position, the
CPU and
12~15 applicable BIT is set.
resource
A CPU system Indicates the slot position mounted with controllable
_IO_A_ I/O module in base at Bit-Map.
I/O Module
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
INSTALL Mounting
BYTE n:0~15 _IO_A_INSTALL[0] Base00
베이스
[n] Position of A _IO_A_INSTALL[1] Base11
베이스
CPU system
_IO_A_INSTALL[15] Base1515
베이스

B CPU system Indicates the slot position mounted with controllable


_IO_B_ I/O module in base at Bit-Map.
I/O Module 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
INSTALL Mounting _IO_B_INSTALL[0] 베이스
BYTE n:0~15 Base00
[n] Position of B _IO_B_INSTALL[1] 베이스
Base11
CPU system
_IO_B_INSTALL[15] Base1515
베이스

11-18
Chapter 11. Flag Table

11.8 Communication Flag


- GLOFA Fnet(Fdnet)/Enet/Cnet Flag Table
This describes main flags related to operation of network. For detailed information, see user’s manual of applicable
communication module.
„ Communication System Status Information Flag
n indicates the slot number mounted with communication module.(n=0-7)
Applicable
Key Word Type Content Description
NET
Version No. of
Applicable
_CnVERNO UINT Communication Display O/S version number of Communication Module.
to all
Module
Indicates the value set at switch of communication module.
Enet : MAC no. displayed at side of comm. module.
No. of
_CnSTNOH UDINT Applicable Fnet/Fdnet : No. Switch value in front of comm. module.
communication
_CnSTNOL UDINT to all Cnet : No. set by frame editor.
module
_CnSTNOH : No. set in RS232C side.
_CnSTNOL : No. set in RS422 side.
Increased one whenever transmission error occurred in
Communication transmission of communication frame.
Applicable Frame Evaluate communication network for connection.
_CnTXECNT UINT
to all Transmission Cnet is the sum of errors occurred when transmitting RS232
Error and RS422.
Increased one whenever reception error occurred in reception
Communication of communication frame.
Applicable Evaluate communication network for connection.
_CnRXECNT UINT Frame
to all Cnet is the sum of errors occurred when transmitting RS232
Reception Error
and RS422.
Increased one whenever failed in communication service.
Applicable Communication Evaluate communication network for connection, its total
_CnSVCFCNT UINT
to all Service Error communication amount and safety of program.
Comm. Scan
Max. time elapsed when transmitting transmission frame with
_CnSCANMX UINT Fnet Time Max.( unit;
TOKEN once at all stations connected with network.
1ms)
_CnSCANAV UINT Fnet Comm. Scan Average time elapsed when transmitting transmission frame
Time with TOKEN once at all stations connected with network.
Average( unit;
1ms)
_CnSCANMN UINT Fnet Comm. Scan Min. time elapsed when transmitting transmission frame with
Time Min.( unit; TOKEN once at all stations connected with network.
1ms))
_CnLINF UINT Selective Communication Indicate the operation of communication module in word.
Applicatio Module System
n Status
Information
_CnLNKMOD BIT15 Operation Indicates if operation mode of communication set to module
Applicable
Mode(RUN=1,T normal or test mode.
to all EST=0)
_CnINRING BIT14 Communication Indicates communication enable(IN_RING = 1) with the other
Applicable
Participation(IN station.
to all _RING = 1)
_CnIFERR BIT13 Applicable Interface Indicates interface stopped with communication module.
Error(Error=1)
to all

11-19
Chapter 11. Flag Table

Applicable
Key Word Type Content Description
NET
_CnSVBSY BIT12 Common-used Indicates lack of source in common-used RAM on
Applicable
RAM Lack communication module.
to all (Lack=1)
_CnCRDER BIT11 Communication Indicates H/W or system O/S error of communication module.
Applicable Module System
to all Error
(Error=1)
_CnCHSEL BIT10 Fdnet Current Indicate the channel((cable) being used by current
Operating communication module during cable redundant.
Channel
(CHA=0)
_CnCHASTS BIT 9 Fdnet Channel A Indicate the connection of Channel A(Cable A) (normal=1).
_CnCHBSTS BIT 8 Fdnet Channel B Indicate the connection of Channel B(Cable B) (normal=1).
_CnNETWAR BIT 7 Fdnet Network Network configuration error flag
Configuration
Indicate the
_NETn_LIV[k] station Indicate if network connected with remote station with no. K or
BOOL connected to
k=0-63 Fnet with local PLC by bit.
ARRAY network in bit.(1
k; station no. This value indicates current network state(write disabled).
= Connected, 0
= Disconnected)
Indicate the
station
_NETn_RST[k] Indicates the station reconnected after disconnected from
reconnected to
BOOL network by bit. To detect next reconnection, always set this
k=0-63 Fnet network after
ARRAY value to 0 in user program with latched to ‘1’ in reconnection.
k; station no. disconnected..(1
(Write Enabled)
= reconnected, 0
= no change)
Indicate user
_RCVn_232[k] defined fame
When RS422 operated in user defined mode and reception
BOOL received by
k=0-63 k; Cnet frame received at RS422, BIT corresponding to setting number
ARRAY setting
setting no. will be 1 and if reading RCV_MSG F/B, deleted to 0.
number.(Receiv
ed=1)
Indicate user
_RCVn_422[k] defined fame When RS422 operated in user defined mode and reception
BOOL
k=0-63 k; Cnet received by frame received at RS422, BIT corresponding to setting number
ARRAY setting number will be 1 and if reading RCV_MSG F/B, deleted to 0.
setting no.
(Received=1)
Indicate data
frame received
_RCVn_ECM[k] BOOL
When data frame received through Enet communication
at applicable
k=0-15 k; Enet channel, BIT corresponding to setting number will be 1 and if
ARRAY communication
Channel No. reading RCV_MSG F/B, deleted to 0..
channel(Receive
d=1)

11-20
Chapter 11. Flag Table

„ Remote Module Control Flag


n indicates the slot number mounted with communication module.(n=0-7)
Applicable
Key Word Type Content Description
NET
Ask S/W reset of analogue, digital I/O for remote I/O
_FSMn_RESET S/W Reset of
station. Enabled in respective or overall request according
BOOL Fnet Remote I/O
*1 to special module, I/O module initialization, and
Station
FSMn_ST_No setting.
Digital Output
Ask digital output clear for remote I/O station(Write
_FSMn_IO_ Reset of
BOOL Fnet Enabled). Enabled in respective or overall request
RESET *1 Remote I/O
according to FSMn_ST_NO setting.
Station
When instantaneous power failure occurred in remote I/O
Highway Link station, operation mode bit of highway link status
Status information turns off and link trouble set to 1. With this bit
_FSMn_HS_ Information
BOOL Fnet ON, operation mode bit turns ON and link trouble sdt and
RESET *1 Initialization of deleted to 0.
Remote I/O
Enabled in respective or overall request according to
station
FSMn_ST_NO setting.
Remote I/O
station no. to Designate remote I/O station no. to perform
perform _FSMn_RESET, _FSMn_IO_RESET, _FSMn_HS_RESET
_FSMn_ST_NO _FSMn_RESE
USINT Fnet (Write Enabled)
*1 T,
0-63 => Respectively designated no. /255 => All stations
_FSMn_IO_RE
designated
SET_FSMn_H
S_RESET
*1 : Flag Monitoring or program write enable flag

11-21
Chapter 11. Flag Table

„ Highway Link Status Information Detailed Flag


m indicates the number of highway link parameter(m = 1,2,3,4).
Applicable
Key Word Type Content Description
NET
Indicated when all stations operate normally as
highway link parameter setting and turned ON in the
following conditions.
1. All stations set to Run at parameter setting and no
RUN_LINK Status error.
_HSmRLINK BOOL Information of 2. All data blocks communicated normally at
Highway Link parameter setting
3. Each station own setting parameter communicated
normally at parameter setting.
This flag keeps ON once turned on unless interrupted
by link enable.
When parameter setting station with _HSmRLINK ON
and data block communication being as shown in the
following, this flag turns ON.
Abnormal Status 1. If parameter setting station is in Run mode or not,
Information of
_HSmLTRBL BOOL 2. If there is an error in parameter setting station
Highway link (LINK
TROUBLE) 3. If communication not good in parameter setting
data block
This flag set to ON if above conditions occurred and
OFF if returned to the normal.
Integrated Indicate the state of communication status information
communication status for each data block of setting parameter.
_HSmSTATE BOOL
k=0-63 information of k data
[k] ARRAY _HSmSTATE[k] = _HSmMOD[k] & _HSmTRX[k] &
at highway parameter
_HSmERR[k]
setting
Mode status
information of k data
BOOL block setting station at Indicate the operation mode of station set to k data
_HSmMOD[k] K=0-63
ARRAY highway parameter block in parameter.
setting (RUN = 1,
Others = 0)
Communication status
information of k data
BOOL block at highway Indicate if parameter k data block communicated
_HSmTRX[k] K=0-63 parameter setting
ARRAY properly as setting.
(Normal= 1,
Abnormal= 0)
Status Information of
k data block setting
BOOL station at highway Indicate if there is an error in parameter k data block
_HSmERR[k] K=0-63
ARRAY parameter setting setting station.
(Normal= 1,
Abnormal= 0)

11-22
Chapter 11. Flag Table

11.9 Access Pass Registration of Flag

Some flag is enabled for variable service through network without controlling user’s program. For
operation of flag, data type, size and composition of data block, see between para 11.1 and 11.8.

(1)Access Variable Registration


Flag Group Access Variable Name Data Write Enable
Writable :
11.1 User Flag _INIT_DONE / _RTC_DATE / _RTC_TOD / _RTC_WEEK _INIT_DONE

11.2 System Error Flag _CNF_ER / _CNF_A_ER / _CNF_B_ER Disabled

_CNF_ER_M / _ANNUN_ER_M /_RIQ_ER_M


11.3 System Fault Mask
_BASE_M[n] / _SLOT_M[n] / _BASE_A_S[n] Enabled
Flag
_SLOT_A_S[n] / _BASE_B_S[n] / _SLOT_B_S[n]

11.4 System Warning Flag _CNF_WAR / _CNF_AB_WAR Disabled

_IO_A_TYER_N / _IO_A_TYERR[n] / _IO_B_TYER_N _ANC_ERR[n],


_IO_B_TYERR[n] / _IO_A_DEER_N / _IO_A_DEERR[n] _ANC_WAR[n],
_IO_B_DEER_N / _IO_B_DEERR[n] / _FUSE_A_ER_N _ANC_WB[n],
_FUSE_A_ERR[n] / _FUSE_B_ER_N / _FUSE_B_ERR[n] _TC_BMAP[n],
_IO_A_RWER_N / _IO_A_RWERR[n] / _IO_B_RWER_N _TC_CNT[n],
11.5 System Error and
_IO_B_RWERR[n] / _SP_A_IFER_N / _SP_A_IFERR[n] _AC_F_CNT,
Warding Detailed Flag
_SP_B_IFER_N / _SP_B_IFERR[n] / _ANC_ERR[n] _RIQ_A_ERR[n],
_ANC_WAR[n] / _ANC_WB[n] / _TC_BMAP[n]
_RIQ_B_ERR[n],
_TC_CNT[n] / _BAT_A_ER_TM / _BAT_B_ER_TM
_AC_F_CNT / _AC_F_TM[n] / _RIQ_ERR[n] _RIQ_C_ERR[n]만
_RIQ_A_ERR[n] / _RIQ_B_ERR[n] / _RIQ_C_ERR[n] Write Enable

_SCAN_MAX,
_CPU_TYPE / _VER_A_NUM / _VER_B_NUM _SCAN_MIN,
_MEM_A_TYPE / _MEM_B_TYPE _SCAN_CUR,
_SYS_A_STATE / _SYS_B_STATE / _PADT_CNF / _RST_TY
11.6 System Operation _STSK_NUM,
_INIT_RUN
Status Information Flag _STSK_MAX,
_SCAN_MAX / _SCAN_MIN / _SCAN_CUR
_STSK_NUM / _STSK_MAX / _STSK_MIN / _STSK_CUR _STSK_MIN,
_RTC_TIME[n] / _SYS_ERR / _RED_STATE _STSK_CUR 만
Write Enable

_DOMAIN_A_ST / _DOMAIN_B_ST / _KEY_A_STATE


11.7 System Configuration
_KEY_B_STATE / _CPU_CNF Disabled
Status Information Flag
_IO_A_INSTALL[n] / _IO_B_INSTALL[n]

_FSMn_RESET / _FSMn_IO_RESET
11.8 Communication Flag Enabled
_FSMn_HS_RESET / _FSMn_ST_NO

11-23
Chapter 11. Flag Table

(2)Access of Array Variable


• Access of BOOL Array Variable(Ex.: _ANC_WB[n])
− Overall Data Required : _ANC_WB
− One Object Required : _ANC_WB[1]

• Access of BYTE Array Variable(Ex.: _SLOT_A_S[n])


− Overall Data Required: _SLOT_A_S
− One Object Required: _SLOT_A_S[1]
− One BIT Write in One Object: _SLOT_A_S[1][0]
− One BIT Read in One Object: _SLOT_A_S[1][0]

• Access of LWORD Array Variable(Ex.: _RIQ_A_ERR[n])


− Overall Data Required: Access Disabled
− One Object Required: _RIQ_A_ERR[1]
− One BIT Write in One Object: _RIQ_A_ERR[1][0]

11-24
Chapter 12. System Definition

Chapter 12. System Definition

12.1 Basic Parameter

As basic parameter necessary in PLC operation, there are memory assignment, restart mode, scan
watchdog time and etc.

[Fig. 12.1] Basic Parameter

(1) Configuration(PLC) Name


It means the name representing PLC system. Used to designate PLC system in outer interface
through communication module.
(2) PLC control permission by communication
It means the parameter enabled for PLC system to permit/inhibit remote control through FAM and
computer communication module excepting GMWIN. If this item designated, operation mode
change and program download are enabled through communication.
(3) Restart Mode
Used to set restart mode of PLC system. When restarting system, there can be selected ‘Cold
Restart’ or ‘Warm Restart’ according to parameter setting.
(4) Hot Restart
Used to set ‘Hot restart mode’ and ‘hot restart permission time’ of PLC system and permission time
can be set up to 23:59:59 in the unit of 1 second.
(5) Resource(CPU) Name
It means unique name of each CPU forming PLC system. Used to designate CPU forming PLC
system in outer interface through communication module.
(6) Scan Watchdog
Used to set the maximum permissible time of program on the purpose of checking if user’s
program operated normally. It can be set up to 32, 768ms in the unit of 1ms.

12-1
Chapter 12. System Definition

(7) %M Area(GMWIN Option Menu)


Used to set the size of Direct Variable area among inner data memory.
This memory area is enabled for direct addressing without variable declaration in programming.
Available area for %M is limited as parameter setting.
Area can be set in option menu of GMWIN.
• Ex. Available Range by Data Type in %M Area Setting Value and Direct Addressing

%M
Bit Range Byte Range Word Range Dword Range Lword Range
Designation

1K byte %MX0 ~ 8191 %MB0 ~ 1023 %MW0 ~ 511 %MD0 ~ 255 %ML0 ~ 127

8K byte %MX0 ~ 65535 %MB0 ~ 8191 %MW0 ~ 4095 %MD0 ~ 2047 %ML0 ~ 1023

16K byte %MX0 ~ 31071 %MB0 ~ 16383 %MW0 ~ 8191 %MD0 ~ 4095 %ML0 ~ 2047

32K byte %MX0 ~ 62143 %MB0 ~ 32767 %MW0 ~ 16383 %MD0 ~ 8191 %ML0 ~ 4095

64K byte %MX0 ~ 24287 %MB0 ~ 65535 %MW0 ~ 32767 %MD0 ~ 16383 %ML0 ~ 8191

• In Redundant System, it can be set from 0 byte to 64K byte in the unit of 1K byte. %M area
setting has an influence on operation delay time in redundant entry. Don’t set more than as
required.

12-2
Chapter 12. System Definition

12.2 I/O Configuration Parameter

To set module configuration of system to be operated, mount with the slot of each base module and
set operation module. If there is difference between setting parameter and actual mounted module,
operation is disabled. I/O configuration parameter was set to empty slot(DEF_EMPTY).
Even if I/O configuration parameter set to empty slot(DEF_EMPTY), module type mismatch error may
be occurred if actual mounted module exists in power on.
Default module setting is disabled in GMR. Mount I/O configuration Parameter actually and set operation module.

[Fig. 12.2] Base, Slot Selection

[Fig. 12.3] Module Type Selection

12-3
Chapter 12. System Definition

Key Word Description Ex. Of Applicable Module

G3I-D22A(16-point), G3I-D22C(16-point),
DC Input DC Input Module
G3I-D24A(32-point), G3I-D28A(64-point)
AC 110V Input AC 110V Input Module G3I-A12A(16-point), G3I-A14A(32-point)

AC 220V Input AC 220V Input Module G3I-A22A(16-point), G3I-A24A(32-point)

Relay Output Relay Output Module G3Q-RY2A(16-point), G3Q-RY4A(32-point)

SSR Output SSR Output Module G3Q-SS2A(16-point), G3Q-SS4A(32-point)


G3Q-TR2A(16-point), G3Q-TR4A(32-point), G3Q-
TR Output TR Output Module
TR4B(32-point), G3Q-TR8A(64-point)
Interrupt Input Interrupt Input Module G3F-INTA(16-point)

Analog Timer Analog Timer Module G3F-AT4A(16-point)

A/D A/D Input Module G3F-AD4A(16 Channel)


G3F-DA4V(16 Channel, Voltage Type),
DAV, DAI D/A Output Module
G3F-DA4I(16 Channel, Current Type)
T/C T/C Input Module G3F-TC4A(16 Channel)

RTD RTD Input Module G3F-RD3A(8 Channel)

PID PID Control Module G3F-PIDB(32 Loop)


High speed counter
HSC G3F-HSCA(2 Channel)
module
Position
Position control analog
Control G3F-POAA(2 Axes)
output module
(Analog)
Position Position control pulse
G3F-POPA(2 Axes)
Control(Pulse) output module
Fieldbus
GLOFA Fnet Communication G3L-FUEA
Module
DEF_EMPTY Empty Slot
[Table 12.1] Ex. Of I/O Parameter Setting Table

12-4
Chapter 12. System Definition

12.3 Communication Parameter

This means the parameter for highway link to set transmit/receive destination, data, period and etc. when
transmitting and receiving certain data repetitively through communication module(For details, see
communication related manual).

[Fig. 12.4] Communication Module Type Selection

Network Type : Selects the type of communication module


Slot Number : Slot position at which communication module mounted
Station Number : Indicates station number of module for highway link communication.

[Fig. 12.5] Highway Link Item Setting

Station Type : indicates type of the opposite communication module and sets to Local/Remote.
Station Number : Indicates the station where data occurred in Transmit/Receive.
Mode : Sets Transmit/Receive.
Block Number : Unique number to distinguish data block from the same communication module.
Transmit/Receive Period : Sets Transmit/Receive period.
Area : Enabled in I,Q,M area selection for data transmission/reception. Sets start address in digit.
Size : Sets the number of word of transmit/receive area.

12-5
Chapter 12. System Definition

12.4 Redundant Parameter

This sets circuit configuration and characteristics for redundant operation.

[Fig. 12.6] Redundant Parameter Main Menu

 Base: Base Number set in I/O parameter.


 Redundant Setting : Sets to Redundant, Switched, and One-sided.
 Base 0 is set to redundant basic base with CPU mounted.

[Fig. 12.8] Input Circuit Setting

12-6
Chapter 12. System Definition

 Redundant Base : Designates the position of redundant base to word unit among triplex inputs.
The setting will be applied to both of Base A and Base B.
 Switched Base: Designates the position of switched base among triplex inputs.
 Time Monitoring: Sets fault detection time(minimum setting : 20ms)

[Fig. 12.8] Output Circuit Setting

Output Position : Designates the position of output word to set circuit type.
Feedback Position : Designates the position of input word to feedback output signal.
Feedback Time : Designates the maximum feedback monitoring time.
Master Control : When faults detected, sets the position of output contact to be used for load
power off.

[Fig. 12.10] Fault Mask Setting

Master Control Monitoring : Sets the position of input contact to monitor master control output
contacts.
Number : Sequential Number.
Continuous Module Position in a fault: When faults of module occurred, sets the position of
module to override this and continue operation. (%IQ[Base No.].[Module Position])

12-7
Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting


13.1 Front Display

CPU Front Display Display CPU


Description and Remedy
4 Digit Display 5 Digit Display Module

Master/Standby . Indicates remote RUN


Master/Standby . Indicates Local RUN
Master/Standby . Indicates Stop
Master/Standby . Indicates CPU system doing or has done reset.
. When pressing Reset Key more than 5 seconds. If key
Master released, restarted in cold restart mode(reset
cold).
Master(When
.While operating in cold restart
starting)
Master(When
. While operating in warm restart
starting)
Master(When
. While operating in hot restart
starting)
Master/Standby .While system performing initialization
Master(OS V1.7 or .While performing initialization task
more) .For OS version 1.6 or less, displayed with ‘r-rUn’, ‘L-rUn’
.While master CPU performing initialization task and
Standby
standby CPU waiting for.
.Start operation in Standby mode. Indicated from power on
of standby CPU to normal operation.
.Standby in this state until normal operation of master when
starting CPU operated in standby previously after system
Standby
shutdown.
.If standby restarted forcedly(by setting mode key, reset
key, GMWIN or DIF key to single mode) with master
off(power off or stop mode), operates in single master.
.While starting standby CPU and downloading program
from master.
Standby .Number indicates the program block number to be copied
(xx:0~ff) (xxx:0~100) during download and if master being equal with standby
program, download operation omitted(Program download).
.If redundant I/O base installed, standby CPU started and
Standby downloaded with initialization data of operating special
(xx:0~ff) (xx:0~ff)
module from mater.
. If redundant I/O base installed, standby CPU started and
Standby initialization of special module performed using initialization
(xx:0~ff) (xx:0~ff)
data downloaded from master.
.Standby CPU started and downloaded with program/set
value data from master, and then batch downloaded with
Standby
(xxx:0~fff) (xxx:0~ffff) changed data(dynamic data: I,Q,M,V) during operation to
enter normal operation.
.If redundant I/O base installed, standby CPU enters normal
(xxx:0~255) Standby operation and then aligns special module data installed at
(xx:0~99)
redundant I/O base with master data.

13-1
Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

CPU Front Display Display CPU Description and Remedy


4 Digit Display 5 Digit Display Module 4 Digit Display

(x:
Standby .Indicates the cause of Master Change by type.
(x:0~4) 0~4)
.During power on standby of extension base in initial start
Master/Standby .If base not supplied with power, mark base number and
(xx:0~15) (xx:0~15)
wait for power on(see 8.1.5.1).
.During power normal return, when AC input power of main
or extension base to OFF/Instantaneous Power
Master/Standby Failure/Voltage Drop(AC_Fail).
.Power Check -> Extension Cable Mounting Check ->
Power Module Replacement
.If changed to STOP Mode by ‘USTOP’ function during
Master/Standby
programming
Master/Standby .Error code(see ‘13.2 Fault Check by error code)
Master/Standby . Error code(see ‘13.2 Fault Check by error code)
Master/Standby .While deleting data of flash memory module.
Master/Standby .While saving program into flash memory module.
Master(One-sided) .Displays mode state in debug(only in one-sided operation.
.Indicates the times of scan when scan break performed in
Master(One-sided)
debug mode.
.Designates the times of break at data break in debug mode
Master(One-sided)
and indicates the number of designated break.
. Designates the times of break at code break in debug
Master(One-sided)
mode and indicates the number of performed break.
Master(One-sided) .When step break performed in debug mode
Master(One-sided) .When abnormal break performed in debug mode
8888 88888 Master/Standby .Checks the operation of display in initial start.

13-2
Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

13.2 Troubleshooting by Error Code

LED
Error
Cause Remedy Operation Display Diagnosis
Code
(7 SEG)
CPU(microprocessor) -A/S required if not removed with
- failure or OS ROM Read Failure Fail:ON Power On
power resupply.
Disabled
-A/S required if not removed with
02 OS ROM Error Failure (S 002) Power On
power resupply.
-A/S required if not removed with
03 OS RAM Error Failure (S 003) Power On
power re-supply.
-A/S required if not removed with
04 Clock IC(RTC) Failure Failure (S 004) Power On
power re-supply.
Dedicated Processor -A/S required if not removed with
05 Failure (S 005) Power On
failure power re-supply.
Memory module program -A/S required if not removed with Power On
06 not saved due to faulty Failure (S 006) RUN Mode
power on in RUN MODE.
program memory Change
Data Memory error -A/S required if not removed with
07 Failure (S 007) Power On
power re-supply.
Communication IC error -A/S required if not removed with
08 Failure (S 008) Power On
power re-supply.
-A/S required if not removed with
09 Interrupt controller error Failure (S 009) Power On
power re-supply.
Watchdog error due to During
- -Power re-supply RESET Fail:ON
congestion of OS program Operation
Installation Position Error -Move to suitable position if CPU
101 STOP (S 101) Power On
of CPU module module mounted at disavailable slot.
110~ CPU misoperation during Restart and if not removed, (S 110 During
RESET
116 operation Check installation environment. ~S 116) Operation
-

-Correct memory module program


and restart(cold)
Poor memory module -Make sure memory module mounting and RUN Mode
22 STOP (E 022)
program power re-supply (If memory module Change
program matched with CPU module,
restart according to parameter.)

-start(cold) after program reloading


-If battery error, replace battery(cold) RUN Mode
23 Abnormal program STOP (E 023)
-If error after program reloading, replace Change
CPU module(cold)

13-3
Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

LED
Error
Cause Remedy Operation Display Diagnosis
Code
(7 SEG)
-Check wrong slot position in GMWIN,
modify module or parameter, and then Power On,
Mismatch of mounted restart(cold when modifying program). Program
STOP
30 module with parameter (E 030) Loading
Reference flag: module type mismatch (RUN)
setting. RUN Mode
error flag (_IO_TYER,_IO_TYER_N,
Change
_IO_TYERR[n])
-Check missed/added slot position in
GMWIN, correct module mounting, and
Missing or additional then restart(as paramter).
STOP
31 mounting of module during Reference flag: module install/remove (E 031) Scan Stop
(RUN)
operation error
flag(_IO_DEER,_IO_DEER_N,_IO_DEER
R[n])
-Check slot position where fuse
disconnection occurred in GMWIN,
Disconnection of module replace fuse and then restart(as
parameter). STOP
32 attached with fuse during (E 032) Scan Stop
(RUN)
operation. Reference flag: Fuse disconnection error
flag(_FUSE_ER,_FUSE_ER_N,
_FUSE_ERR[n])
-Check slot position where access error
occurred in GMWIN, replace module and
then restart(as parameter). Scan Stop
Normal access disabled of STOP
33 I/O module data during Reference flag: I/O module read/write (E 033) During
operation error flag (RUN)
Programming
(_IO_RWER,_IO_RWER_N,_IO_RWERR
[n])
-Check slot position where access error
occurred in GMWIN, replace module and Power On
Normal access disabled of then restart(as parameter). STOP Scan Stop,
34 Special/Link module data Reference flag: Special/Link Module (E 034)
(RUN) During
during operation Interface error
Programming
rror(_SP_IFER,IP_IFER_N,_IP_IFER[n])

-Check redundant contacts where errors


occurred using redundant I/O fault detailed
Redundant I/O Error :
item of GMWIN, feedback connection, and
When error occurred in STOP
35 module error, and take an action and then (E 035) Scan Stop
output redundancy or input restart(as parameter) (RUN)
triplex contacts
Reference Flag: Fault Contact Error
Details (_RQ_ERR[n])
Program scan time
-Check scan delay watchdog time
exceeded the specified During
designated by parameter, modify parameter STOP (E 040)
40 scan watchdog time in Programming
or program, and then restart(cold)
parameter during operation
Indecipherable command
During
41 occurred during user - Reload program and restart(cold) STOP (E 041)
Programming
programming

13-4
Chapter 13. Program Troubleshooting

LED
Error
Cause Remedy Operation Display Diagnosis
Code
(7 SEG)
Stack exceeded normal During
42 -Restart(cold) STOP (E 042)
range during programming Programming

-Heavy fault detection error of external


Heavy fault of outside equipment
STOP
equipment detected by user (_ANNUN_ER,_ANC_ERR[n]) (E 050) Scan Stop
50 program during operation (RUN)
Repair wrong equipment and restart,
referring to flag(as parameter)

-Restart and then if occurred continuously, STOP


Standby task exceeded the During
55 check installation environment(Require A/S (E 055)
specified range (RUN) Programming
if not removed)
‘E_STOP’ Function -Remove the cause of ‘E_STOP’ function During
60 STOP (E 060)
performed started in program and restart(cold) Programming
Redundant
Program and data sync error between Operation
Redundant system sync
300 CPU during operation or entry of redundant STOP (E 300) Entry or
operation error
operation During
Operation
- When restarting in redundant operation
y Set operation mode of standby CPU to
STOP.
y Remove errors of master CPU and
restart.
Standby CPU failed to
y Set operation mode of standby CPU to Participated
participate in redundant
301 STOP (E 301) in standby
operation due to Master RUN.
- When restarting in one-sided operation of operation
CPU error.
standby
y Set master CPU to STOP or power OFF
y Restart using reset switch of standby
CPU or set operation mode to
STOPRUN.
Data memory backup
500 - If no error in battery, restart RUN (E 500) Power On
disabled
- If no error in battery, reset the time using Power On,
501 Clock data error RUN (E 501)
GMWIN and etc. Scan Stop
Power On
502 Battery voltage drop - Replace battery with power on RUN (E 502)
Scan Stop

13-5
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring


14.1 Installation

14.1.1 Installation Environment


This equipment can be warranted its reliability and safety when used in the environment specified
in general specifications. Take precautions when installing the equipment in order not to miss the
environment specified in general specifications.

1) Environmental Conditions
(1) Install in Control Panel available for waterproof and dustproof.
(2) Avoid continuous shock or vibration.
(3) Do not expose to direct ray of light.
(4) Not condensed due to rapid changed temperature.
(5) Do not exceed 0~55°C of ambient temperature.
(6) Do not exceed 5~95% of relative humidity.
(7) No corrosive or flammable gases.

2) Construction
(1) Prevent leftovers entered PLC when machining screw hole or connecting wires.
(2) Install where easy to handling.
(3) Do not install at the same panel with high voltage equipment.
(4) Keep the distance between wiring duct and environmental module more than 100mm.
(5) Ground to good noise environment.

3) Radiation Design of Control Panel


(1) If installing PLC in closed control panel, perform radiation design in consideration of its heating
as well as heating by the other equipment. If ventilated by means of ventilation fan and
commercial fan, it can have an influence on PLC system due to entrance of dust or gas.
(2) It is recommended to install filter or use closed type heat exchanger.

The followings describe how to calculate its own power consumption of PLC system necessary in
radiation design.
1) Block Diagram on Power Consumption of PLC system

Power Communi Communi Output Input Special


cation cation Relay
transistors
Load

14-1
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

2) Power consumption by each Part

(1) Power Consumption of Power Module


Power Conversion Efficiency of AC Power Module is about 70% and 30% consumed as heating.
Three Seventh(3/7) of output power will be its own power consumption.
Therefore, calculated as follows.
• Wpw = 3/7 {(I5V X 5) + (I24V X 24)} (W)
I5V : Sum of consumption current in each module DC 5V(inside consumption current)
I24V : Sum of average consumption current of external power supply(DC 24V) such as output
module and etc. (Not applicable if DC 24V supplied from outside without PLC power)

(2) Sum of Power Consumption in DC 5V Circuit


If the sum(I5V) of inside consumption current of each module calculated, the sum of power
consumption in DC 5V circuit of overall system will be calculated as follows.
• W5V = I5V X 5 (W)

(3) DC 24V Average Power Consumption(Power Consumption of Number of Simultaneous On


Points)
If calculating the sum of average consumption current of ‘External Power Supply(DC 24V) in the
modules as 24V power supply output module, the sum of DC 24V circuit power consumption is
as follows.(This time, PLC self supply and external supply current will be included).
• W24V = I24V X 24 (W)

(4) Average Power consumption by Output Terminal Voltage Drop of Output Module(Power
Consumption of Number of Simultaneous On Points)
If voltage drop occurred between both output terminal in load driving such as TR and SSR
output module, calculate the power consumed as a heat in drive element of module.
• Wout = Iout X Vdrop X Output Point X Simultaneous On Rate (W)
Iout : Output Current(Actually Used) (A)
Vdrop : Voltage drop of each output module (V)

(5) Average Power consumption of Input Module(Power Consumption of Number of Simultaneous


On Points)
• Win = lin X E X Input Point X Simultaneous On Rate (W)
Iin : Input Current(Effective Value if AC) (A)
E : Input Voltage(Actually Used) (V)

(6) I/O Power consumption of Special Module


Calculate the sum of power consumption occurred concerning I/O of special module.
• WS = ( I5V, I+15V, I-15V, I24V, I100V, I220V ) (W)

The sum of power consumption as calculated above by block will be overall power consumption of
system.
• W = WPW + W5V + W24V + Wout + Win + Ws (W)

Calculate heating amount as this overall power consumption(W) and check temperature rist in
control panel.

In temperature rise of control panel is calculated as follows.


T = W / UA [°C]
W : PLC system overall power consumption(as above calculated)
A : Area in control panel [m2]
U : Uniform temperature in control panel by fan • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 6
Without ventilating control panel •••••••••••••••••••••••4

14-2
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14.1.2 Precautions
This describes precautions from opening to installing each module.
• Avoid dropped or shocked.
• Do not disconnect PCB from case. It can cause a failure.
• Prevent foreign matters such as leftovers entered module in wiring. If entered, remove them.

1) Precautions when handling I/O module


This describes precautions when handling or installing I/O module.
(1) Recheck of I/O Module Specification
Take precautions of input voltage for Input Module. For output module, if voltage applied
exceeded the maximum open/close capacity, it can cause a failure, damage and a fire.
(2) Used Wire
Select the wire in considerations of environment temperature and allowable current and its
minimum specifications should be more than AWG20 (0.5mm2).
(3) Environment
If wiring I/O module, away from high temperature equipment or material and do not contact
wiring to oil and etc, for long time. Otherwise, it can cause short, damage or wrong operation.
(4) Polarity
Make sure the polarity of module before applying power.
(5) Wiring
• If connecting I/O wire together with high voltage line or power line, it can cause induction error
and wrong operation or a failure.

• Make sure the wire not passed in front of I/O operation display(LED). (It can’t identify I/O mark
correctly).

• If inductive load connected to output module, connect surge killer or diode in parallel with load.
Connect cathode of diode to + of power.

OUT Inductive Load

Output
COM Surge Killer

OUT Inductive Load


+
Output
-
Diode
COM

14-3
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

(6) Terminal
Check that terminal tight connected and prevent leftovers entered PLC in terminal wiring or
screw hole machining works. This can cause misoperation or failure.

(7) Besides as above mentioned, do not disconnect PCB board from case.

2) Precautions when attaching with Base

This describes the precautions when attaching PLC at control panel and etc.
(1) Keep sufficient distance between module and structure or parts to facilitate module replacement
and ventilation.
(2) Avoid longitudinal connection and horizontal attachment for ventilation.
(3) Use different panel or install in separately with vibration source such as large electronic
contactor or no fuse breaker, and etc.
(4) Install wiring duct as follows if necessary.
• If installed in the upper of PLC, keep the height of wiring duct less than 50mm for good ventilation. Keep
the distance from upper of PLC enough to press HOOK located at top of base.
• If installed in the bottom of PLC, optical cable or coaxial cable can be connected. When
bending the connected cable, take considerations of minimum radius.
(5) If the equipment located in front of PLC to avoid radiation noise or heat(located inside of door),
install with a distance of more than 100mm. Install the equipment with a distance of more than
50mm from left/right direction of base.

More than 100mm

Base

100mm more than

Other High Voltage Equipment


Equip- Base
ment
Heating Object
More than
50mm

[Fig. 14.1] PLC Attachment

14-4
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

Contactor
Relay,

PLC

More than
100mm

[Fig. 14.2] Distance from Front Equipment [Fig. 14.3] Longitudinal Attachment(Unavailable) [Fig. 14.4] Horizontal Attachment(Unavailable)

14-5
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14.1.3 Removal of Module


This describes how to install or remove Power Module, CPU Module, I/O Module, Special Module, and
etc. from base.

1) Installing Module
• Insert mounting lug in the bottom of module into module mounting hole of base.
• Push top of module and set in base.
• Pull top of module and make sure firmly mounted at base.

Hook
Module
Base
Module
Connector

Module Mounting Lug


Module Mounting Hole

REMARK

• Always set the module after inserting module-mounting lug into module mounting hole. Attaching
excessively can cause pin bent or module broken.
• Especially if used in the place exposed to vibration and shock, set the module into base with screws.

14-6
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

2) Removal of Module
• Take seize the module by hands and push the hook of bash to the end.
• While pressing the hook, pull out the module upward with the center of bottom.
• While pulling out the module upward, remove mounting lug from module mounting hole.

Hook

Module

Module
Connector

Module mounting hole

REMARK

• When removing the module, remove module from base with hook pressed and detach mounting lug from
module mounting hole of base. This time, detaching forcedly can cause hook or module mounting lug
damaged.

14-7
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14.2 Wiring

This describes the wiring if GM1/2 system used.

14.2. 1 Power Wiring


1) If power change exceeded the specified, connect constant-voltage transformer.

Base

Power

Constant-
voltage
transformer

2) Connect the power with small noise between lines and earth.
(In case of big noise, connect insulation transformer.)

Insulat Insulat
ion PLC ion I/O
Transf Transf Device
ormer ormer
3) Disconnect I/O and Power Devices from the power of PLC as shown in the following schematic
diagram.
Main
Power PLC Power
*
PLC
AC220V T1

I/O Power
Main Power PLC Power
* I/O
I/O Power
Power
Device

Main circuit Power Main circuit power


Main Circuit
Coil

4) Connect different power between Redundant System A and B.


Install power switch in separately.
AC220V
B
Power
Power

전 전
System 원 Redundant Basic 원
A Base B
A System
Power

전 전
Power

Switched I/O
원 원 Extension Base
A B

Redundant I/O Extension


Power


Base A

Power

P Redundant I/O Extension


Base B
o

14-8
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

5) When DC24V output used in power module


y Do not connect several power modules in parallel. Otherwise, it can result in module broken.
y If lack in DC24V output capacity with one power module, supply with external DC 24V as shown
in the following figure.

Power I 전원
Power I
/ /
AC O AC O
LG LG
24V 24V

전원
Power DC 24V
I
AC
/
O Power
LG
24V Supply

y Redundant power module can be connected with DC24V in parallel. This time, connect wiring in
consideration of module replacement.
전원
Power 전원
Power I
6) Connect C 110V line, AC 220V line, DC 24V /
line in the shortest distance
AC AC O
as tight as possible. LG LG
24V 24V
7) Use AC110V line, AC 220V line as thick as
possible to decrease voltage drop.
(See 14.2.4 Wiring Lead Specification)

8) Keep AC 110V line, DC 24V line away from


main circuit(high voltage, current)line, and I/O
signal line. Keep it in the distance more than 100 mm.

To prevent surge such as thunder, use serge absorber for preventing thunderbolt as shown in the
following figure.

PLC
I/O Device

E1 E2

Surge Absorber for Thunderbolt


protection

14-9
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

Remarks

• Disconnect Earth(E1) of surge absorber for thunderbolt protection and Earth(E2) of PLC.
• Select surge absorber for thunderbolt protection not exceeding the max. permissible voltage of surge
absorber when power voltage increased to the maxim.

10) Use insulation shield trans and noise filter to prevent noise entered.
11) Connect the wiring of each input power with twisted as short as possible and do not pass, the
wiring of shield trans or noise filter through duct.

14.2.2 I/O Device Wiring


(1) The lead specification of I/O wiring is 0.5~2 mm2, but it is recommended to use convenient lead.
(See ’14.2.4 Wiring Lead Specification’)
(2) Disconnect input line from output line.
(3) Disconnect I/O signal line from main circuit line of High Voltage/Great power more than 100mm.
(4) If main circuit line not disconnected from power line, use package shield cable and ground PLC.

PLC Shield Cable


Input

RA

Output
DC

(5) Ground the pipe if wiring connected.


(6) Disconnect output line of DC 24V from AC 110V or AC 220V lines.
(7) Long wiring more than 200m can cause error due to current leakage by capacity, see Chapter 16,
16.4 Each Example.

14.2.3 Earth Wiring


(1) This PLC can be used without grounded with sufficient noise protection excepting there are more
noise. But see the followings in case of ground.
(2) Perform dedicated ground if possible.
Ground in Type 3 Ground(Resistance; less than 100Ω).
(3) If dedicated ground impossible, do common ground as shown in b) of the following figure.

14-10
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

PLC Other PLC Other PLC Other


Equipment Equipment Equipment

Type 3 Ground Type 3 Ground

A) Dedicated Ground : Very Good B) Common Ground(Good) C) Common Ground : Poor

(4) Use ground lead of more than 2mm. Place ground point as near as possible in PLC to shorten the
length of ground line.
(5) Ground LG of power module and FG of base board in separately.
Power

Power
Power

LG LG
FG FG FG

A) Dedicated Ground : Very Good B) Common Ground(Good) C) Common Ground : Poor

(6) If wrong operation occurred due to ground, disconnect FG of Base from ground.
(7) Ground of Redundant Base

전 전 전
Power

Power

C D C
Power
Power

P I P 원 원 원 Switched I/O
U F U Extension Base
B A
A
B
B
A A B B

LG LG FG
FG

• In redundant system, install LG in separately for each system power.


• It purposes to prevent simultaneous download of operating system and back up system.
• FG is functional ground and installed in separately with LG.

14-11
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14.2.4 Wiring Lead Specification


The following table describes lead specification used in wiring.

Lead Spec. (mm2)


External Connection Type Minimum Maximum
Digital Input 0.5 (AWG20) 1.5 (AWG16)
Digital Output 0.5 (AWG20) 2.0 (AWG14)
Analogue I/O 0.18 (AWG24) 1.5 (AWG16)
Communication 0.18 (AWG24) 1.5 (AWG16)
Main Power 1.5 (AWG16) 2.5 (AWG12)

Protection Ground 1.5 (AWG16) 2.5 (AWG12)


[Table 14.1] Lead Specification for External Wiring

14-12
Chapter 14. Installation and Wiring

14.3 Trial Operation

This describes what performed before and after trial operation.

14.3.1 Checkpoint before Trial


Prior to trial, check the followings.

Checkpoint Description
• Did the connector of Interface Driver/Receiver Module connected with that
Extension Cable Connection of extension cable properly?
Interface Module Setting • Did switch setting of Interface Driver/Receiver Module done properly?
• Is configuration name and mounting of module mounted at each slot of
Module Mounting Basic and Extension Base good?
Fuse • Didn’t fuse damaged or broken?
• Did the cable connected with each terminal matched with signal name?
Connection of Power Line
• Is terminal screw torque of power module and I/O module terminal good?
and I/O line
• Is current capacity of cable good?

14.3.2 Trial Procedures


It describes the procedures of trial operation after a completion of PLC installation.

Start
Power On :
1) Check input power.
2) Check power voltage for I/O device.
3) Set key switch of CPU Module A, B to Stop and mode key of DIF module to ‘A+B’.
4) Set CH On/Off switch of interface driver module.
5) Set Oper switch, base number setting switch and END switch of interface receiver module.
6) Turn on CPU_A side. After starting CPU_A , turn on CPU_B side.
7) Check that Power LED of power module illuminated.
8) Check that Stop LED of CPU module illuminated.
9) Check that Oper LED of Interface Driver Module illuminated.
10) Check that Oper LED of Interface Receiver Module illuminated.
(See 5.7.3 How to install Remote Interface Module)

Programming : Perform programming with peripheral equipment, download program in CPU and then test
it(see 8.1.3 Initial Operation Start).

Check of external output wiring : Check external output wiring using forced output function of
peripheral equipment(GMWIN).

Check of external input wiring : Check the wiring of input equipment in Monitor Mode of
peripheral equipment(GMWIN).

14-13
Chapter 15. Maintenance

Chapter 15. Maintenance


Perform daily and regular checks to keep PLC in best state.

15.1 Maintenance and Check

PLC module consists of semi-conductor element (except of relay output module) and has semi-
permanent life. But regular check is required to prevent error occurred in element due to the
environmental effect. The following table describes what should be checked about one or two times 6
months.

Checkpoint Criteria Remedy


Temperature 0~+55°C
Control operating temperature and humidity
Humidity 5~95%RH properly.
Environment
Use vibroisolating rubber or establish other
Vibration No Vibration anti-vibration steps.
Rolling of each module No rolling Make sure all modules not rolled.
Loose screw of terminal No looseness Tighten if loose.
Input Voltage Regulation −15% / +10% 이내 Keep within permissible regulation. .
Check amount and
Spare Parts retained state of spare Fill the lack and improve retained state.
parts
∗ If an error or a failure found, replace module. To do this, prepare the minimum spare parts of
module.

15.2 Daily Check

Consists of daily check as follows.

Checkpoint Content Criteria Remedy


Check the attached screw Tighten
Base Attachment Attached firmly.
for loose. Screws
• Check if screws attached
to module tightened firmly.
I/O Module Attachment Tightened firmly. Check screws
• Check the upper cover of
module for missing.
Tighten
Loose terminal screws No looseness
Screws
Terminal and
Proximity of pressure
Extension Cable Proper space Calibrate
connection terminal
Connection
Connector of extension
No loose connector Calibrate
cable
Power LED Check illuminated Illuminated(If error, extinguished) See Chap. 8
Illuminated(If error, extinguished
Run LED Check illuminated in Run See Chap. 8
or flickered)
Stop LED Check extinguished in Run Extinguished if error See Chap. 8
Display Check illuminated or Illuminated with Input ON,
Input LED See Chap. 8
LED extinguished extinguished with Input OFF
Check illuminated or Illuminated with Output ON,
Output LED See Chap. 8
extinguished extinguished with Output OFF
7SEG
Error Code Display Check No Error Code See Chap. 8
Display

15-1
Chapter 15. Maintenance

15.3 Regular Check

Take necessary actions with checking these items about 1 or 2 times 6 months.

Checkpoint Check Method Criteria Remedy


Environmental
Measure using 0~55 °C
temperature Adjust to general
thermometer/
Environmental spec.(environment
Environment hygrometer 5~95%RH
humidity standard in control
Measure corrosive
Environmental panel)
gas No corrosive gas
pollution
Looseness, rolling Move each module Attached firmly
PLC State Dust, Foreign Tighten screw
Visual Inspection No attachment
matters
Loose Screw Tighten with driver No looseness Tighten
Proximity of
pressure
Visual inspection Proper space Calibrate
Connection connection
terminal
Tighten connector
Loose Connector Visual inspection No looseness
set screw
Measure voltage
AC 85 ~ 132V Change power
Power/Voltage Check between AC110
AC 170 ~ 264V supply
and 220V terminal
• Check the sum of
Check battery Replace if warranty
power failure time
replacement interval, period expired
Battery and warranty period
voltage drop without battery LOW
• No battery voltage
indication indication.
drop indication
Replace regularly
even if not fused.
Otherwise, it can
Fuse Visual inspection •Not fused
cause heating of
element by rush
current.

15.4 Replacement of Module

It is recommended to stop operation of module and base during operation and replace the module to
be installed at base. For procedures, 9.3 Module Replacement During Operation’.

15-2
Chapter 15. Maintenance

15.5 Replacement of Battery

When back up battery less than the specified voltage(2.6V) for maintaining program and power
failure, 501’ will be displayed on 7_SEG in front of CUP.

Remarks

• If system warning flag _BAT_ERR turned On, it indicates battery voltage for memory backup and user
program less than the specified. Replace battery as soon as possible.

„ Replacement Procedures of Battery


After the life of CPU expired, replace battery. Even if battery disconnected from CPU module, memory back
up is enabled for a short time by super capacitor for back up. But replace battery as soon as possible. With CPU
power on, it is possible to replace battery.

Replacement of Battery

Open the front cover of CPU.

Push the lug for battery


disconnection protection, pull out
battery from holder, and
disconnect battery connector.

Insert new battery into holder in


right direction and connect to
connector. Battery

Close the front cover of CPU. Lug for


preventing
battery
disconnection
CPU
cover
‘E502’ in 7_SEG?
Or is battery error No
displayed when
connected to
GMWIN7

END

Poor new battery

15-3
Chapter 15. Maintenance

Remarks

• Connect battery properly.


• Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short, solder, and etc.
• Wrong treatment of battery can cause a fire due to heating, broken and flame,

15.6 Replacement of Fuse

Replacement of Fuse

Turn off PLC

Open the front cover of Power Fuse Holder


Module

Disconnect fuse from fuse holder.

Install new fuse at fuse holder.

Turn on PLC.

Is ‘PWR’ LED No
illuminated in front of
power module?

Yes

END

See Power LED extinguished of


16.2 Troubleshooting.

15-4
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

Chapter 16. Troubleshooting


This describes the content, cause and remedy of each error occurred in system operation.

16.1 Principle of Troubleshooting

To improve system reliability, it is important to use the equipment with high reliability, but take an
action rapidly when trouble occurred.
To operate system rapidly, find the cause of trouble and take corrective actions rapidly. Take
precautions of the followings when performing troubleshooting.

(1) Visual Check


Visually check the followings.
• Machine operation(stop, operation)
• Power
• I/O device
• Wiring(I/O line, extension and communication cable lines)
• Check each display (Power LED, Run LED, Stop LED, I/O LED, and etc.) and then connect
with peripheral equipment and check PLC operation and program.

(2) Error Check


Observe how errors changed by the following control
• Set key switch to STOP and turn On/Off.

(3) Range Limitation


Estimate the cause of trouble as above mentioned.
• PLC? External?
• I/O Module? Others?
• Sequence Program?

16.2 Troubleshooting

This describes how to fine trouble and error code with divided into content and remedy.

Trouble

If Power LED
extinguished Go to flow if Power LED extinguished

If output module operates


abnormally Go to flow if output module operates abnormally

If program disabled to
write Go to remedy if communication not connected normally

If displaying error code on 7


SEG. LED. See Chapter 13. program troubleshooting

16-1
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16.2.1 Flow if Power LED extinguished


This describes remedy procedures if Power LED extinguished on power on or during operation.

Power LED extinguished

Is power supply No
Power Supply.
enabled?

Yes No Is Power LED Yes


illuminated?

Is power voltage set to AC No Set power supply within the


85~132 or AC 170~ 264V? specified.

Yes No Yes
Is Power LED
illuminated?

Is fuse disconnected? Yes


Replace fuse.

No No Is Power LED Yes


illuminated?

No
Is power module set?
Supply power module.

Yes No Is Power LED Yes


illuminated?

1) Check current capacity and


Is over-current protection Yes decrease excessive current.
operated? 2) Turn off and then on input
power.
No

No Is Power LED Yes


illuminated?

Fill in troubleshooting question


sheet and then contact local END
A/S center or agent.

16-2
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16.2.2 Remedy if Fail LED illuminated


This describes remedy procedures if Fail LED illuminated on power on.

7-SEG code displayed E □□□

Fail LED illuminated

Contact local A/S center or


agent.

16.2.3 Remedy if 7-SEG code displayed S□□□


This describes remedy procedures if 7-SEG code displayed S □□□on power on.

7-SEG displayed S□□□

Contact local A/S center or


agent.

16-3
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16.2.4 Remedy if 7-SEG code displayed E□□□

Stop LED flickered

Read error code of system


flag.

Yes Correct the program because


Program Error?
of S/W error.

No

Set operation mode to stop.

Take an action according to


error content.

Write the program.

Yes Program Error? Set operation mode to Run.

No

Fill in troubleshooting
question sheet and then
contact local A/S center or
END agent.

16-4
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16.2.5 If Output Module Operates Abnormally


This describes remedy procedures if Load of output module will not ON during operation.

Output load will not ON.

No Check output in monitor mode


Is output module LED
illuminated? of peripheral equipment.

In case of module without fuse


Yes

Yes Is Fuse disconnection Is output module LED Check


display of output module illuminated? No
illuminated?
Yes
No

Is power voltage approved


Replace module.
for load?
No

Yes

Is voltage between each


output and COM terminal of
output module normal? Abnormal
load
voltage
Normal load
voltage

Poor output module. Replace


output module. Check power wiring for load
and turn on the power again.

Replace output common fuse.

Check rush current if load Is output common


fuse disconnected even END
turned on simultaneously
if fuse replaced? No

Yes

Change output load and set


Max. Simultaneous On current
of load to the specified.

16-5
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16.2.6 Remedy if communication not connected properly.


This describes remedy procedures if program write disabled in CPU module.

Program Write disabled

No
Set key switch to remote stop
Is key switch set to mode and run program write.
remote stop mode?

Yes

Yes Using peripheral equipment, read


S□□□? error code and correct it.

16-6
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16.2.7 Remedy of Interface Module Trouble

FAIL LED

If mounting position error of driver, turn off and then correct it.
Driver
If no error in position, contact A/S center.

.In case of wrong mounting position of receiver, turn off and then correct it.
Receiver .Check if multi receiver installed at desired extension base..
If no error, contact A/S center.

OPER LED OFF

.Check CPU module installed in its position.


Driver . If mounting position error of driver, turn off and then correct it.
If not corrected, contact A/S center.

.Check OPER switch set to Y.


.Check that CH ON/OFF switch of connected driver to ON.
. In case of wrong mounting position of receiver, turn off and then correct it.
Receiver
.Check cable installed properly.
.Check power module LED for power supply.
If not corrected, contact A/S center.

CH ERROR LED
ON

.Check cable for connection.


.Connect OUT of driver to In of receiver and OUT of receiver to IN of receiver.
.Check that power supplied to connected extension base.
.Check power module LED illuminated.
Driver
.Check CH ON/OFF switch set properly.
.Set receiver connecting CH to ON and the others to OFF.
.Check OPER switch and END switch of connected driver set properly.
.Set END switch of termination receiver to ‘Y’ and the others to ‘N’. .
. If not corrected, contact A/S center.

16-7
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16.3 Troubleshooting Question Sheet

If errors occurred while using PLC in GMR redundant series, fill in this question sheet and contact A/S
center by telephone or fax.
y For errors related special and communication modules, fill in the question sheet attached to
applicable user’s manual. .

1. User Information: Name Tel.)


Firm Name FAX)
2. Used type :
3. Applicable Equipment Details
y CPU Module Details : OS Version ( ), Product Serial No. ( )
y GMWIN Version No. used in program compile : ( )
4. Control Equipment and System Overview :

5. Used Mode of CPU:


y By key switch ( ), y By GMWIN or communication ( )
y Memory Module Operation ( )
6. Is Fail LED of CPU module illuminated? Yes( ), No( )
7. Error Code displayed on 7-SEG of CPU module front display :
8. Error Message by GMWIN:
9. Initialization Program Used : Initialization Program ( )
10. Remedy on error code of 7 :

11. Troubleshooting tried to remove other errors :

12. Characteristics of error


y Repetition( ) : Periodic( ), Related to specific sequence( ), Related to
environment( )
y Intermittent( ) : General error interval :
13. Detailed description of errors :

14. Applicable system block diagram :

16-8
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16.4 Each Example

This describes trouble type and remedy for each circuit.

16.4.1 Trouble Type and Remedy of Input Circuit


This describes trouble example and remedy for input circuit.

Situation Cause Remedy


Leakage current of external equipment
(If driven with proximity switch and etc. )
y Connect proper resistance and capacitor
AC Input to keep the voltage between terminals below
Input signal return voltage.
will not off C
누설전류
Leakage
current
R
AC Input
~ C
External외부기기
equipment
R
Leakage current of external equipment ~
(Driven by limit switch with neon lamp attached)
Input signal y CR value will be determined according to
will not AC Input leakage current.
off(with − Recommended C : 0.1 ~ 0.47uF
C
neon lamp 누설전류
Leakage R : 47 ~ 120 Ω (1/2W)
R current
illuminated) Or install the circuit in separately.
~
External외부기기
equipment

Leakage current by capacity between leads of y Apply the power at external equipment as
wiring cable shown in the following figure.

AC Input AC Input
Input Signal
will not off 누설전류
Leakage
current

~ ~
외부기기
External equipment 외부기기
External equipment

Leakage current of external equipment y Connect proper resistance to keep the


(Driven by switch with LED attached) voltage between input module terminal and
common terminal more than off voltage as
DC Input shown in the following figure.
Input Signal DC Input
will not off 누설전류
Leakage current
R R

External 외부기기
equipment

y Circulating current by another plural power y Keep plural power to single.


y Connect circulating current protective
DC Input diode(Following figure)
Input Signal DC Input
will not off L
E1 E2 L
E1 E2

y If E1 > E2, circulated

16-9
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

16.4.2 Trouble Type and Remedy of Output Circuit


This describes example and remedy of trouble for output circuit.

Situation Cause Remedy

y If load half-wave rectified inside). y Connect the resistance of tens kΩ ~


(This occurred in solenoid valve) hundreds kΩ.
y If the polarity set to , C will not be R
charged and set to polarity , voltage plus
power voltage charged at C be applied at
Outpu D
Load both end of diode(D). Maximum voltage is t
applied with about 2√2. C
~
excessive R
Load
voltage with C
Output ~
R
Contact Off Load

NOTE) If used as above mentioned, there is


no problem in output element, but degradation
of diode(D) in load can cause errors.

y Leakage current by surge absorption y Connect the resistance of several tens kΩ


circuit connected with output element in or equivalent impedance CR to load.
parallel.
Output
NOTE) If wiring length longer from output
Load
module to load, leakage current can be
Load will not
C occurred due to capacity between lines.
off
Leakage current ~ C
R R R
누설전류
Load Load

Output Timer
T
Load
~
C
Leakage current ~
R Output X
~

y Leakage current by surge absorption y Drive C-R type timer with relay.
circuit connected with output element in y Use besides C-R type timer.
parallel. NOTE) Inside circuit may be half-wave rectified
In case of C- according to timer.
R type timer,
time error

16-10
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

Situation Cause Remedy

Output
Output

Load
Load
E1
E2 E1
E2

y Circulating current by another two power y Make plural current as single.


used y Connect circulating current preventive
diode(following figure).

Load will not


off(For AC)

y If E1< E2, circulated


y If E1 set to Off(E2 to On), circulated Note) If load being relay and etc., it is
necessary to connect diode for absorbing
counter voltage as dashed line as shown in the
figure.

16-11
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

Trouble Type and Remedy of Output Circuit(Continued)


Situation Cause Remedy
y Insert magnetic connector with small time
y Excessive current in OFF
constant and drive load with its contacts.
[If driving stream load(Large time
constant L/R) as large current as solenoid with
transistor output] Output

Output

Abnormally t Current in OFF


Long Off Load E1
Load
Response
Time of load E1

y Because current flows through diode when


transistor output Off, there can be delay more
than 1 second according to load.

Broken
transistor for Rush Current of incandescent lamp y To inhibit rush current, flow dark current
output between one third(1/3) and one fifth(1/5) of
Output rated power in incandescent lamp.
Output

E1
R E1

Sink type TR output


When illuminated, rush current more than 10
times may be flown.
Output

E1

Source type TR output

16-12
Chapter 16. Troubleshooting

Empty Page

16-13
Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

Chapter 17. Outside Dimension


17.1 Outside Dimension(Unit:mm)

17.1.1 Redundant Interface Module

130.5 35

17-1
Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17.1.2 Remote Interface Module

250

118 35

17-2
Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17.1.3 Redundant Base

E
„ GMR-B02M

C D

E
„ GMR-B04M

C D

17-3
Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

„ GMR-B08E(Same Configuration in GMR-B12E)

E

C D

(Unit : mm)
Items A B C D E

Basic GMR−B02M 424 439 230 250 31.5


Base GMR−B04M 564 579 230 250 31.5

GMR−B08E 480 495 230 250 16.5


Extension
Base GMR−B12E 620 635 230 250 16.5

17-4
Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17.1.4 Power Module

250

128

17-5
Chapter 17. Outside Dimension

17.1.5 Extension Cable

Mounting Position Length (m) Mounting Position Length (m)


G2C-E031 0.3 G2C-E402 40
G2C-E061 0.6 G2C-E502 50
G2C-E121 1.2 G2C-E602 60
G2C-E401 4 G2C-E702 70
G2C-E601 6 G2C-E802 80
G2C-E102 10 G2C-E902 90
G2C-E202 20 G2C-E103 100
G2C-E302 30

17.1.6 Memory Module

53

17

Connector
21

17-6
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System


A1.1 System Block Diagram

This shows the block diagram of Redundant system. It consists of CPU, Power, I/O, Remote I/O
communication Redundancy. For network Redundancy between PLC and with higher next system,
see ‘Communication Redundancy’ manual.

Power Module
Power Module

0 1 2 3 C C 0 1 2 3 P
P P o
Redundant E F F D E F F
U U w
Basic Base # 0 U U D I U U D
I I er
E E I F E E I
A B M
A A A A A A
o
Power Module

Power Module

P P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
o o F F
Base # 1 w w In In In In In Out A D R R
(switched) er er put put put put put put D A I I
M M 16 16 C C
o o 32 32 32 32 32 32
Power Module

P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Base # 2 o F I
w In In Out Out Out In A D R
(Redundant−A) /
er put put put put put put D A I
M 16 16 C F
o 32 32 32 32 32 32
Power Module

P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
o F I
Base # 2 w In In Out Out Out In A D R
(Redundant−B) /
er put put put put put put D A I
M 16 16 C F
o 32 32 32 32 32 32
Power Module

Power Module

P P 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
R
o o
Remote Station 16 w w B In In In Out Out Out A D
er er R put put put put put put D A
M M A 16 16
o o 32 32 32 32 32 32

A1-1
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1.2 Function Setting by Module

This shows the example of function setting by module.


In the system where only switching I/O used, slot between 4 and 7 of ‘Base #1’ is only applicable
For I/O Redundancy, refer to slot between 0 and 3 of ‘Base #1’ and ‘Base #2-A’ and ‘Base #2-B’
For remote I/O, refer to ‘Remote Station 16’.

„ Base #1
Position Usage Related Circuit
0slot Triplex Assigned Input : Overall Process Data *1 (Triplex Input1)
1slot Triplex Assigned Input: Detailed Data of Each Process *2 (Triplex Input 2)
Input(Switched Input)
*3 (Redundant
2slot Set No. 0 Contact to 0 of 2 slot in #2-A (Output Power Off)
Output 1)
Set No. 1 Contact to 0 of 2 slot in #2-A (Output Power Off)
Input(Switched Input) *4 (Redundant
3slot
Monitor Redundant Output Contact(3slot of #2-A,B) Output 2)
4slot Input(Switched Input) : BCD Counter of Product Output None
5slot Output(Switched Output) : BCD Indicator of Product Output None
6slot Switched A/D Input Module None
7slot Switched D/A Output Module None

„ Base #2-A
Position Usage Related Circuit
0slot Triplex Assigned Input : Overall Process Data *1 (Triplex Input 1)
1slot Triplex Assigned Input: Detailed Data of Each Process *2 (Triplex Input 2)
Redundant Output
*3 (Redundant
2slot Set No. 0 Contact to power off of 4 slot in #2-A
Output 1)
Set No. 1 Contact to power off of 4 slot in #2-B(not connected)
Redundant Output : Overall Process Output *4 (Redundant
3slot (Provide with Fault Contact Check Function) Output 2)
Redundant Output : Detailed Output of Each Process
*3 (Redundant
4slot (Provide each A and B base with Fault Contact No. Check and
Output 1)
Auto Shut Off function. )
*3 (Redundant
5slot Monitor output contact of 4 slot in #2-A
Output 1)
*Special Redundant
6slot Redundant A/D Input Module
1
*Special Redundant
7slot Redundant D/A Output Module
2

„ Base #2-B
Position Usage Related Circuit
0slot Triplex Assigned Input: Overall Process Data *1 (Triplex Input 1)
1slot Triplex Assigned Input: Detailed Data of Each Process *2 (Triplex Input 2)
이중화 출력
*3 (Redundant Output
2slot Set No. 0 Contact to power off of 4 slot in #2-A(not connected)
1)
Set No. 1 Contact to power off of 4 slot in #2-B
Redundant Output : Overall Process Output *4 (Redundant Output
3slot (Provide with Fault Contact Check Function) 2)
Redundant Output : Detailed Output of Each Process
*3 (Redundant Output
4slot (Provide each A and B base with Fault Contact No. Check and
1)
Auto Shut Off function. )
*3 (Redundant Output
5slot Monitor output contact of 4 slot in #2-A
1)
6slot Redundant A/D Input Module *Special Redundant 1
7slot Redundant D/A Output Module *Special Redundant 2

A1-2
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

„ Remote 16 Station
Position Usage Related Circuit
0slot Remote Input : Product End Item Loading BCD Counter None
1slot Remote Input None
2slot Remote Output : Product Raw Material Loading BCD Indicator None
3slot Remote Output : Product Output BCD Indicator None
4slot Remote Output None
5slot Remote Output None
6slot Remote A/D Input Module None
7slot Remote D/A Output Module None

A1.3 Function Setting by Contact

According to ‘Appendix 1-2 Function Setting by Module’ as above-mentioned, only the related parts
will be indicated with contact number. This part shall be registered in parameter. When programming,
do not divide into A and B for I/O Redundancy and treat as one contact.

Position Usage Related Contact


%IW1.0.0 Triplex Assigned Input %IW2.0.0
%IW1.1.0 Triplex Assigned Input %IW2.1.0
Input(Switched Input)
%IW1.2.0 %IX1.2.0 %QX2.2.0(A)
%IX1.2.1 %QX2.2.1(B)
%QW1.3.0 Monitor Redundant Output Contact of Slot in Base #2 %QW2.3.0
%QW1.4.0 Input(Switched Input) None
%QW1.5.0 Output(Switched Output) None

Position Usage Related Contact


%IW2.0.0 Triplex Assigned Input %IW1.0.0
%IW2.1.0 Triplex Assigned Input %IW1.1.0
Redundant Output(Used for Shut Off)
%QW2.2.0 %QX2.2.0 %QW2.4.0
%QX2.2.1 %QW2.4.1
Redundant Output
%QW2.3.0 %IW1.3.0
Senses Fault Contact Number
Redundant Output
%QW2.4.0 Senses Fault Contact Number and Base Position(DC Output) %IW2.5.0
Auto Shutoff of Operating Power %QX2.2.0/1 (A,B)
%IW2.5.0 Monitor Redundant Output Contact of Slot 4 in Base #2 %QW2.4.0

A1-3
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1.4 Project

This shows overall configuration of ex. Program. For parameter and variable, see applicable section
of this manual. Here only the content of program will be provided.

The following configuration component can be applied selectively according to its own system
configuration.

• ‘SP_INITIAL’ ; as restart program, must be prepared when using special module.


• ‘SP_HINITIAL’ ; prepared only if setting hot restart.
• ‘_ERR_MASK’ ; Ex. of error task program.
• 'SW_ANALOG’ ; Ex. of special module related program in Switched I/O.
• ‘SW_I/O’ ; Ex. of I/O contact in Switched I/O.
• ‘RED_ANALOG’ ; Ex. of special module related program in Redundant I/O.
• ‘RED_IO’ ; Ex. of I/O contact in Redundant I/O.
• ‘RED_CHECK’; Ex. of status processing program for Redundant contact.
• ‘REMOTE_ANALOG’ ; Ex. of special module processing program in Remote.
• ‘REMOTE_IO’; Ex. of I/O contact in Remote.

Project→ PLC Type : GMR Writer : Hong Kil Dong

Configuration(PLC) → Name : GMR_DEMO


Configuration Global Variable → 7 declared.
Access Variable → one declared.
Resource(CPU) 0 → Name: RES0
Resource Global Variable → 0 declared.
Task Definition → 3 Defined.
[LD] Program → SP_INITIAL (Positioning start with Task _INT) : c:\gmwin30\source\sp_initial.src
[LD] Program → SP_HINITIAL (Positioning start with Task _H_INT) :
c:\gmwin30\source\sp_hinitial.src
[LD] Program → _ERR_MASK (Positioning start with Task _ERR_SYS) :
c:\gmwin30\source\err_mask.src
[LD] Program → SW_ANALOG : c:\gmwin30\source\sw_analog.src
[LD] Program → SW_I/O : c:\gmwin30\source\sw_io.src
[LD] Program → RED_ANALOG : c:\gmwin30\source\red_analog.src
[LD] Program → RED_IO : c:\gmwin30\source\red_io.src
[LD] Program → RED_CHECK : c:\gmwin30\source\check_io.src
[LD] Program → REMOTE_ANALOG : c:\gmwin30\source\remote_analog.src
[LD] Program → REMOTE_IO : c:\gmwin30\source\remote_io.src
Direct Variable Comment → 0 declared.

Parameter
Basic Parameter
I/O Parameter
I/O Highway Link Parameter
I/O Redundancy Parameter
Inserted Library Files
c:\gmwsin30\lib\communi.rfb
c:\gmwsin30\lib\redutil.rfb
c:\gmwsin30\lib\remote3.rfb
c:\gmwsin30\lib\special.rfb

A1-4
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

A1.5 Ex. Of Program

C : \gmwin30\source\sp_initial.src
Comment ### ------ Special Module Initialization when restarting COLD & WARM

Comment # ------ Analog Input Module Initialization of Switched Base

Row 2 SADINIT
AD4INI
Row 3 RE Q DONE
• Program Description : In Cold or Warm Restart, initialize special module
Row 4 1 BASE STAT installed at No. 1 and No. 2 Base. When positioning
start, start function block once (OFF -> ON) and
Row 5 6 SLOT ACT connected to bus unconditionally.

Row 6 ADCHEN CH • Function Block Description:


DATA
AD4INI : Initialization Function Block of A/D Module installed at
Row 7 ADTYPE Switched Base.
TYPE
FILT DA4INI : Initialization Function Block of D/A Module installed at
Row 8 ADFTEN Switched and Redundant Base.
_EN
FILT RAD4INI : Initialization Function Block of A/D Module installed at
Row 9 ADFTVAL
_VAL Redundant Base.
AVG_
Row 10 AVGEN
EN
Row 11 AVGSEL AVG_
SEL
Row 12 NTIME NUM_
TIME
Row 13

Row 14

Comment # ------ Analog Output Module Initialization of Switched Base

Row 16 SDAINIT
DA4INI
Row 17 RE Q DONE

Row 18 1 BASE STAT

Row 19 7 SLOT ACT

Row 20 DACHEN CH

DATYPE DATA
Row 21
TYPE

Row 22 DASEL SEL

Row 23

Comment ### ------ Analog Input Module Initialization of Redundant Base

Row 25 RADINIT
RAD4INI
Row 26 RE Q DONE

Row 27 2 BASE STAT

Row 28 0 SLOT ACT Go to next page

ADCHEN CH
Row 29
ADTYPE DATA
Row 30 TYPE

Row 31

A1-5
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

From the previous


page

Comment # ------ Analog Output Module Initialization of Redundant Base

Row 34 RDAINIT
DA4INI
Row 35 RE Q DONE

Row 36 2 BASE STAT

Row 37 1 SLOT ACT

Row 38 DACHEN CH

Row 39 DATYPE DATA


TYPE

Row 40 DASEL SEL

Row 41

Comment # ------ COLD & WARM Restart Initialization End-------#

Row 43 SADINIT.D SDAINIT.D RADINIT.D RDAINIT.D _INIT_DO


ONE ONE ONE ONE NE

Row 44 ( )

Row 45
• Program Description : Check if initialization of special module completed, turn ON
_INIT_DONE flag to exit initialization program and then enter
scan program.

A1-6
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

C : \gmwin30\source\sp_hinitial.src

Comment ### ------ Special Module Initialization in Hot Restart.

Comment ### ------ Analog Input Module Initialization in Switched Base

SADINIT
Row 2
AD4INI
1OFF
Row 3 RE Q DONE • Program Description : In Hot Restart, initialize special module installed at
No. 1 and No. 2 Base. As Function Block memorized
1 BASE STAT
previous REQ status(ON), turn OFF(I_10FF condition)
Row 4
and then restart(ON -> OFF -> ON).
Row 5 6 SLOT ACT
• Function Block Description :
ADCHEN CH AD4INI : Initialization Function Block of A/D Module installed at
Row 6
Switched Base.
ADTYPE DATA DA4INI : Initialization Function Block of D/A Module installed at
Row 7 TYPE Switched and Redundant Base.
ADFTEN FILT RAD4INI : Initialization Function Block of A/D Module installed at
Row 8
_EN Redundant Base.
ADFTVAL FILT
Row 9
_VAL

Row 10 AVGEN AVG_


EN
Row 11 AVGSEL AVG_
SEL
Row 12 NTIME NUM_
TIME
Row 13

Row 14

### ------ Analog Input Module Initialization in Switched Base

Row 16 SDAINIT SDAWR


1OFF DA4INI DA4AWR
Row 17 RE Q DONE RE Q DONE

Row 18 1 BASE STAT 1 BASE STAT

Row 19 7 SLOT ACT 7 SLOT ACT

Row 20 DACHEN CH DACHEN CH

Row 21 DATYPE DATA DATA


SDAOUT
TYPE

Row 22 DASEL SEL

Row 23

### ------ Analog Input Module Initialization in Redundant Base


• Program Description : As output value of D/A module
Row 25 RADINIT deleted due to restarting, re-output with the value before
1OFF RAD4INI stopped if necessary.
Row 26 RE Q DONE
• If programmed enable to write output value immediately
Row 27 2 BASE STAT after entered scan program, ‘DA4AWR’ and ‘RDA4AWR’
can be omitted.
Row 28 6 SLOT ACT
Go to next page

ADCHEN CH
Row 29

ADTYPE DATA
Row 30 TYPE

A1-7
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

Continued From
Previous Page

Comment ### ------ Analog Output Module Initialization in Redundant Base

Row 34 RDAINIT RDAWR


1OFF DA4INI RDA4AWR
Row 35 RE Q DONE RE Q DONE

Row 36 2 BASE STAT 2 BASE A_DO


NE

Row 37 7 SLOT ACT 7 SLOT A_ST


AT

DACHEN CH DACHEN CH A_AC


Row 38
T

DATYPE DATA RDAOUT DATA B_DO


Row 39
TYPE NE

Row 40 DASEL SEL B_ST


AT

Row 41 B_AC
T

Row 42

Comment ### ------ HOT Restart Initialization END

Row 44 _INIT_DO
SADINIT.D SDAWR.DON RADINIT.D RDAWR.DONE
ONE E ONE NE
Row 45 ( )
• Program Description : Check if initialization of special module and writing to D/A Module
completed, turn ON _INIT_DONE flag to exit initialization program
and then enter scan program.

A1-8
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

C : \gmwin30\source\err_mask.src

# ------ No. 4, 5 Slot Fault Mask of Base No. 1


Comment
OR • Program Description : To prevent fault occurred in the module
Row 1 EN EN0
installed at slot No. 4 and 5 of Base No. 1,
write mask data 2#0011_0000(16#30) in
Row 2 _SLOT_M[1] IN1 OUT _SLOT_M[1] _SLOT_M[1].

16#30 IN2 • When using actually, it is convenient to check the condition,


Row 3 determine if masked or not and set unconditioned run as shown in
the example at parameter.
Row 4

C : \gmwin30\source\sw_analog.src

Comment # ------ Analog I/O of Switched Base

Row 1 SADRD MODIFY SDAWR


AD4ARD ADMODIFY DA4AWR
RE Q DONE RE Q DONE RE Q DONE
Row 2

1 BASE SADRD.DAT DATA SDAOUT 1 BASE STAT


Row 3 STAT
A _IN
6 SLOT ACT 7 SLOT ACT
Row 4

ADRDCH CH DATA DAWRCH CH


Row 5

SDAOUT DATA
Row 6

Row 7

• Program Description : Read A/D module value installed at slot No. 6 of switched base(No. 1) and output to
D/A module installed at slot No. 7.
• Function Block Description
AD4ARD : Function Block reading value and status of A/D module.
ADMODIFY : User Defined Function Block receiving A/D value and making it enable to be output
DA4AWR : Function Block outputting data to D/A Module.

C : \gmwin30\source\sw_io.src

(Ex. of Program Omitted)

• Program Description : Read Input Contact Value installed at slot No. 4 of Switched Base(No. 1) and output
to Output Contact installed at slot No. 5.

A1-9
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

C : \gmwin30\source\red_analog.src
# -Analog I/O of Redundant Base
Comment

Row 1
RADRD DATASEL MODIFY RDAWR
RAD4ARD ADDATASEL ADMODIFY RDA4AWR
Row 2 RE Q DONE RE Q DONE RE Q DONE RE Q DONE

2 BASE A_DO RADRD A_D A_DON DATA SELDATA SELDATA DATA DATA RDAOUT 2 BASE A_DO
Row 3
NE ONE E _OUT IN _OUT NE

Row 4 6 SLOT A_ST RADRD A_A A_AC 7 SLOT A_ST


AT CT T AT

Row 5 ADRDCHEN CH A_AC RADRD A_D A_DA DAWRCHEN CH A_AC


T ATA TA T

Row 6 A_DA RADRD B_D B_DO RDAOUT DATA B_DO


TA ONE NE NE

Row 7 B_DO RADRD B_A B_AC B_ST


NE CT T AT

Row 8 B_ST RADRD B_D B_DA B_AC


AT ATA TA T

Row 9 B_AC
T • Program Description : Read a pair A/D value installed at slot No. 6 of Redundant Base No. 2
and
Row 10 B_DA output equal value to both two D/A Modules installed at slot No. 7 of Base No. 2.
TA
• Function Block Description :
Row 11 RAD4ARD : Function block reading and outputting both of value and status of Redundant
A/D.
ADDATASEL: User defined function block outputting only normal value from two A/D values.
ADMODIFY : User defined function block reading A/D value and making data enable to be
t t
C : \gmwin30\source\red_io.src

Comment ### ------ I/O Input of Redundant Base


### ------ Output Control for overall process data input of Redundant Base
Comment
MCTRL
MAIN_CTRL
Row 2 RE Q DONE

Row 3 %IW2.0.0 IN OUT %QW2.3.0

Row 4
### ------ Output Control for detailed data input of each process in Redundant Base

Comment SCTRL
STEP_CTRL • Program Description : Read input value of triplex system, calculate
Row 6 RE Q DONE
operation and then output to Redundant output
%IW2.1.0 IN OUT %QW2.4.0 module.
Row 7 • Function Block Description :
MAIN_CTRL : User defined function block running control algorithm
Row 8
of main process.
STEP_CTRL : User defined function block processing detailed

C : \gmwin30\source\check_io.src (Ex. of program omitted)


• Program Description: Check error of Redundant output contact, notify to operator or repair, and then
prepare additional program by deleting fault flag according to operator’s instruction.
Refer to Error Flag:_RIQ_ER, _RIQ_ER_M, _RIQ_ERR[n], _RIQ_A_ERR[n],
_RIQ_B_ERR[n], _RIQ_C_ERR[n] etc. utilized.

A1-10
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

C : \gmwin30\source\remote_analog.src

Comment # ------ Analog I/O of Remote 16 Station

Row 1 RMTADINT RMTADINTE


T200MS RMTADINTE ADR4INI
N N
Row 2 RE Q NDR ( S )

1 NET_ ERR
Row 3
NO • Program Description : Initialize A/D and D/A modules installed at
Row 4 16 ST_N STAT Remote. Check initialization condition every
O 200ms.
0 BASE ACT • Function Block Description :
Row 5
ADR4INI : Function block initializing A/D Module of Remote
DAR4INI : Function block initializing D/A Module of Remote
Row 6 6 SLOT

Row 7 CHEN CH

Row 8 ADTYPE DATA


TYPE
Row 9 RMTDAINT RMTDAINTE
T200MS RMTDAINTE DAR4INI N
N
Row 10 RE Q NDR ( S )

Row 11 1 NET_ ERR


NO
Row 12 16 ST_N STAT
O
Row 13 0 BASE ACT
• Program Description : Read A/D value installed at slot No. 6 of Remote
16 Station and output to D/A module installed at
Row 14 7 SLOT
slot No. 7.
• Function Block Description :
Row 15 CHEN CH
ADR4RD : Function Block reading value and status of A/D in Remote.
ADMODIFY : User defined function block reading A/D value and
Row 16 ADTYPE DATA
TYPE
making data enable to be output.
DAR4WR : Function block outputting data to Remote D/A.
Row 17 DASEL SEL

Row 18 RMTADRD MODIFY RMTDAINTE RMTDAWR


T200MS RMTADINTE ADR4RD ADMODIFY
N N DAR4WR
RE Q NDR RE Q DONE RE Q NDR
Row 19
1 NET_ ERR RMTADRD.D DATA DATA RMTDAOUT 1 NET_
Row 20 ERR
NO ATA _IN _OUT NO
16 ST_N STAT 16 ST_N STAT
Row 21
O O
0 BASE ACT 0 BASE ACT
Row 22
6 SLOT DATA 7 SLOT
Row 23
CHEN CH CHEN CH
Row 24
RMTDAOUT DATA
Row 25

Row 26 RMTADINTE
RMTADINT.
ERR N
Row 27 ( R )
RMTADRD.E
RR • Program Description : Create initialization condition when special module
Row 28 of Remote not accessed due to power OFF and etc.
• Feedback at Row 2 and Row 10 and start initialization function block.
Row 29
RMTDAINT. RMTDAINTE
ERR N
Row 30 ( R )
RMTDAWR.E
RR
Row 31

A1-11
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

C : \gmwin30\source\remote_io.src

Comment ### ------ I/O Input of Remote Station 16.

### ------ Output Product End Item Loading BCD Counter Input of Remote Station 16 to BCD Indicator.
Comment
MOVE
Row 2 EN EN0

%ID16.0.0 IN1 OUT %QD16.2.0


Row 3

Row 4
### ------ Output Product Output BCD Counter Input to Output BCD Indicator of Remote Station 16.
Comment
MOVE
Row 6 EN EN0

%ID1.4.0 IN1 OUT %QD16.3.0


Row 7

Row 8

A1-12
Appendix 1. Example of Redundant System

C : \gmwin30\source\remote_check.src

# ------ Status Monitor of Remote Station 16


Comment

Row 1 REMOTEST
T100MS STATUS • Program Description : Detect the operation of Remote Station and the
Row 2 RE Q NDR status of Redundant communication line and make
data
Row 3 NET_ ERR enabled to be monitored at next higher system.
NO
• Function block Description :
Row 4 ST_N STAT STATUS : Function Block verifying operation status of Remote Station
CH US

Row 5 ST_N LOG


OL
Row 6 PHY

Row 7 USR_
D
Row 8

Row 9 # ------ Remote Connection Operating

Row 10 REMOTEST. REMOTEST. REMOTEST. REMOTE_AC


NDR USR_D[112] USR_D[113] TIVE
Row 11 ( S )
REMOTEST. REMOTE_AC
ERR TIVE
Row 12 ( R )

Row 13 # ------ Remote A-side Connection Communicating

Row 14 # ------ Remote B-side Connection Communicating

Comment REMOTE_A
REMOTE_AC REMOTEST.
CH_ACT
TIVE USR_D[115]
Row 16 ( )
REMOTEST] REMOTE_B
USR_D[115] CH_ACT
Row 17 ( )
Row 18 # ------Good Remote A-side Connection

Row 19 # ------ Good Remote B-side Connection

Row 20 REMOTE_A
REMOTE_AC REMOTSET.
CH_OK
TIVE USR_D[116]
Row 21 ( )
REMOTSET. REMOTE_B
USR_D[117] CH_OK
Row 22 ( )

A1-13
Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2.1 Basic Function Table

This describes the example data of program size and processing speed for basic function.
Processing
FB Size (Byte) *1 Library *2
Speed(us)
Name Function
IL LD Size (Byte) IL LD *3
ABS (int) Absolute Value operation 24 44 - 0.72 1.36
ADD (int,dint) Add 16 36 - 0.48 1.12
ADD (lint) Add 40 60 - 1.72 2.36
AND (word,dword)
AND 4 24 - 0.12 0.76
AND (lword) AND 8 28 - 0.24 0.88
DIV (int,dint) Divide 16 36 - 0.48 1.12
DIV (lint) Divide 28 48 - 290 290
EQ (int,dint) ‘Equal’ Comparison 12 32 - 0.36 1.00
LIMIT(int,dint)Upper/Lower Limit 40 60 964 7.2 7.9
MAX (int,dint) Max. 40 60 1120 9.4 10.0
MOVE (lint) Data Copy 0 20 - 0.00 0.64
MUL (int,dint) Multiply 16 36 - 0.48 1.12
MUL (lint) Multiply 28 40 - 310 310
MUX (int,dint) Multiplex 48 68 552 8.4 9.0
MUX (lint) Multiplex 56 76 - 12.0 12.6
ROL Rotate Left 32 52 392 1.80 2.44
SUB (int,dint) Subtract 16 36 - 0.48 1.12
SUB (lint) Subtract 40 60 - 1.72 2.36
BCD_TO_DINT Convert BCD type to DINT type. 4 24 280 10.0 10.6
BCD_TO_INT Convert BCD type to INT type 4 24 136 10.0 10.6
BCD_TO_SINT Convert BCD type to SINT type 4 24 84 10.0 10.6
BYTE_TO_SINT Convert BYTE type to SINT type 0 20 - 0.00 0.64
Convert DATE type to STRING
DATE_TO_STRING 28 48 60 360 360
type
DINT_TO_INT Convert DINT type to INT type 56 76 - 1.68 2.32
DINT_TO_BCD Convert DINT type to BCD type 4 24 172 17.4 18.0
DT_TO_DATE Convert DT type to DATE type 0 20 - 0 0.64
DT_TO_TOD Convert DT type to TOD type 4 24 2 0.60 1.24
DT_TO_STRING Convert DT type to STRING type 28 48 60 442 442
DWORD_TO_WOR Convert DWORD type to WORD
0 20 - 0 0.64
D type
INT_TO_DINT Convert INT type to DINT type 4 24 - 0.12 0.76
INT_TO_BCD Convert INT type to BCD type 4 24 108 6.0 6.6
NUM_TO_STRING(
Convert Number to STRING 36 56 312 280 280
int)
SINT_TO_BCD Convert SINT type to BCD type 4 24 84 6.0 6.6
Convert STRING type to INT
STRING_TO_INT 4 24 48 360 360
type
CONCAT Connect String 48 68 168 31.4 32.0
DELETE Delete String 44 64 328 21.5 22.1

A2-1
Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

Processing
FB Size(Byte) *1 Library Size(Byte) Speed(us)
Name Function *2
IL LD IL LD *3
EQ(str) ‘Eaual’ Comparision 44 64 752 13.5 14.1
FIND Find String 28 48 228 7.1 7.7
INSERT Insert String 48 68 348 40.9 41.5
LEFT Obtain Left of String 36 56 140 18.6 19.2
LEN Calculate Length of String 4 24 88 6.5 7.1
LIMIT(str) Uppwer/Lower Limit 70 90 964 38.4 39.0
MAX(str) Max. 56 76 1120 19.8 20.4
MID Obtain MID of string 44 64 208 31.6 32.2
REPLACE Replace String 56 76 424 37.3 37.9
RIGHT Obtain RIGHT of string 36 56 220 28.4 29.0
ADD_TIME (time) Add time 32 52 220 3.1 3.7
DIV_TIME (i1=time) Divide time 32 52 436 6.9 7.5

Remarks

*1 program memory size occupied whenever using the function once.


*2 program memory size occupied only once though the function used in the program several times
*3 IL Program Criteria(Input Variable 2EA, 10 string)
# Extendable Function(ADD,MUL, MAX, MIN, MUX,EQ 등) depends on two Input Variables.
# Character string processing function depends on if its length consisted of 10 characters.

• Processing speed of the above functions can be faster according to the version of CPU module.

A2-2
Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2.2 Basic Function Block Table

This shows data example for program/data memory size and processing speed of basic function block.
FB Size (Byte)*1 Instance Processing Speed(us) *4
Library Size
Name Function Memory Size
IL LD (Byte) *2 IL LD
(Byte) *3
CTU Count up counter 56 56 120 6 6.4 6.4
CTD Count down Counter 56 56 166 6 6.4 6.4
Count Up/Down
CTUD 88 88 196 6 10.4 10.4
Counter
6.2:Run 6.2: Run
TON ON Delay Timer 40 40 248 20
4.5:Not run 4.5: Not run
7.7: Run 7.7: Run
TOF OFF Delay Timer 40 40 288 20
4.9: Not run 4.9: Not run
8.1: Run 8.1: Run
TP Pulse Timer 40 40 312 20
6.1: Not run 6.1: Not run
Rising Edge
R_TRIG 32 32 24 1 2.6 2.6
Detection
Falling Edge
F_TRIG 32 32 24 1 2.6 2.6
Detection
SR Set Priority Bistable 48 48 32 1 2.9 2.9
RS Reset Priority Bistable 48 48 20 1 2.9 2.9
System Resource
SEMA 48 48 44 1 2.9 2.9
Distribution

Remarks

*1 program memory size occupied whenever using the function once.


*2 program memory size occupied only once though the function used in the program several times

*3 data memory size occupied whenever using the function once.


• Processing speed of the above functions can be faster according to the version of CPU module.

A2.3 Function Block for Communication Module

If using communication Redundancy in Redundant System or C-NET Module in Switched Base, use
the function block with the same style of communication function block of Single CPU system
(GM1, GM2, GM3).
For detailed information of function block, see user’s manual for communication module or
communication Redundancy.

A2-3
Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2.4 Function Block for Special Module

A2.4.1 Function Block in One-sided Operation(Attached at Switched Base)


If installing Special Module at Switched Base without Redundant configuration in Redundant System,
use the function block with the same style of communication function block of Single CPU system
(GM1, GM2, GM3).
For detailed information of function block, see user’s manual for communication module or
communication Redundancy.

A2.4.2 Function Block in Redundant of Special Block(Attached at Redundant Base)


This describes how to use function block if using Redundancy special module. Existing function
block or special function block can be used according to used module. See the following table.

For detailed information of Redundancy function block, see user’s manual of applicable special
module.

Segment Module Name Initialization Control Function Block


Function Block
G3F-AD4A
RAD4INI RAD4ARD
Analog Input G3F-AD4B
G3F-AD3A RAD3INI RAD3ARD
G3F-DA4V
Same as in Single RDA4AWR
G3F-DA4I
Analog Output
G3F-DA3V
Not supported Not supported
G3F-DA4I
RTD Input G3F-RD3A Same as in Single RRTD3ARD
TC Input G3F-TC4A Same as in Single RTC4ARD

Remarks

• If function block running request continues ON, changed to new value every scan and if OFF, keep
existing value.
• In Redundant System, prepare initialization function block in Initialization Task Program.

A2.4.3 Function Block When installed at Remote(Installed at Remote Base)


If installing Special Module at Remote Base in Redundant System, use the function block with the
same style of Remote function block of Single CPU system(GM1, GM2, GM3).
For detailed information of function block, see user’s manual of applicable special module..

Remarks

• If function block running request continues ON, changed to new value every scan and if OFF, keep
existing value.
• Remote Initialization Function Block shall be prepared in Scan Program to start Special Module
Initialization when Remote restarted during operation.

A2-4
Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

A2.5 Immediate I/O Function Block

In Redundant System, use Immediate I/O Function with separate and different style for data
synchronization between Redundant CPUs.

See the following detailed information of Function.

RDIREC_IN
Input Data Immediate Update Name GMR GM1 GM2 GM3 GM4 GM6 GM7
(WORD) Applicability ○

Function Block Description

„ Input
EN : Function run at 1.
RDIREC_IN BASE : Position No. of base with Input Module installed.
SLOT : Position No. of slot at base with Input Module installed.
BOOL ENO MASK: Designate BIT not updated among WORD data to
EN BOOL
USINT OUT update input
BOOL
USINT BASE
USINT SLOT
„ Output
WORD CH
ENO : If no error, output 1.
MASK OUT : If Input Data Update completed, output 1.

Function
 Function RDIREC_IN(Input Data Immediate Update); If EN set to 1 during scanning, read WORD data
designated at CH among data of designated Input Module and update and enter only BIT data not masked(1)
into Input Image Area.
 Function RDIREC_IN is used to update ON/OFF statue of Input (%I) during scanning.
 Because scan sync. batch processing generally performed Input Data Read as a package after a completion
of scan program, Input Data Update will be disabled from external during 1 scanning.
If using Function DIREC_IW, Input Update can be done during programming.
 For ex. of program, see ‘DIREC_IN’ function of ‘GLOFA-GM Command Glossary.

A2-5
Appendix 2. Function/Function Block Table

RDIREC_O
Output Data Immediate Update Name GMR GM1 GM2 GM3 GM4 GM6 GM7
(Unit; WORD) Applicability ○

Function Block Description

„ Input
EN : Function run at 1.
RDIREC_O BASE : Position No. of base with Output Module installed.
SLOT : Position No. of slot at base with Output Module installed.
BOOL ENO CH : WORD unit channel designation of data to update output.
EN BOOL
USINT OUT MASK: Designate BIT not updated among WORD data to
BOOL
USINT BASE update output

USINT SLOT
WORD CH
„ Output
MASK ENO : If no error, output 1.
OUT : If Input Data Update completed, output 1.

Function

 Function RDIREC_O(Output Data Immediate Update); If EN set to 1 during scanning, read WORD 16 outputs
designated by CH among data of Output Modules designated by BASE, SLOT and update and then output
only
BIT data not masked(1) into Output Image Area.
 Function RDIREC_O is used to update ON/OFF statue of Output (%Q) during scanning.
 Because scan sync. batch processing generally performed Output Data Write as a package after a completion
of scan program, Output Data Update will be disabled from external during 1 scanning.
If using Function RDIREC_O, Output Update can be done during programming.
 For ex. of program, see ‘DIREC_O’ function of ‘GLOFA-GM Command Glossary.

A2-6
Appendix 3. I/O Contact/ Variable Definition Table

I/O Contact Definition Table


Input( ) / Output( )
Variable Name Position Function Variable Name Position Function

Base Slot Contact Module Type Base Slot Contact Module Type

0 16

1 17

2 18

3 19

4 20

5 21

6 22

7 23

8 24

9 25

10 26

11 27

12 28

13 29

14 39

15 31

A3-1
Appendix 3. I/O Contact/ Variable Definition Table

I/O Contact Definition Table


Input( ) / Output( )
Variable Name Position Function Variable Name Position Function

A3-2
Appendix 3. I/O Contact/ Variable Definition Table

Local Variable Definition Table


Program Block Name: Basic/Array Data( ), Function Block Instance( )
Memory
Variable Name Data Type Data Kind*1 Default Function
Assigned

*1 Basic/Array Variable: Local(VAR), Constant(VAR_CONSTANT), Retain(VAR_RETAIN), External(VAR_EXTERNAL)


Function Block Instance: Local(VAR), Retain(VAR_RETAIN), External(VAR_EXTERNAL)

A3-3
Appendix 3. I/O Contact/ Variable Definition Table

Global Variable Definition Table


Resource( O )/Configuration( ) Name: Basic/Array Data( ), Function Block Instance( )
Memory
Variable Name Data Type Data Kind*1 Default Function
Assigned

*1 Basic/Array Variable: Standard(VAR_GLOVAL), Constant(VAR_GLOVAL_CONSTANT), Retain(VAR_GLOVAL_RETAIN)


Function Block Instance: Standard(VAR_GLOBAL), Retain(VAR_GLOBAL_RETAIN)

A3-4
Warranty

1. Term of warranty
LGIS provides an 18-month-warranty from the date of production.

2. Range of warranty
For troubles within the term of warranty, LGIS will replace the entire PLC or repair the troubled parts free of
charge except the following cases.

(1) The troubles caused by improper condition, environment or treatment.


(2) The troubles caused by external devices.
(3) The troubles caused by remodeling or repairing based on user’s own discretion.
(4) The troubles caused by improper usage of the product.
(5) The troubles caused by the reason which exceeded the expectation from science and technology level
when LGIS produced the product.
(6) The troubles caused by natural disaster.

3. This warranty is limited to the PLC itself only. It is not valid for the whole system which the PLC is attached to.
Head Office Overseas Sales Team
th
LG Twin Towers East Bldg. 9 Floor, 20, Yoido-Dong PLC sales team
Youngdungpo-Gu, Seoul 150-721, KOREA TEL : +82-2-3777-4640~7 FAX : +82-2-3777-4648

Domestic Sales Team Web Site


PLC sales team (Seoul) http://www.lgis.co.kr (Korean)
TEL : +82-2-3777-4620~34 FAX : +82-2-3777-4622 http://www.lgis.com (English)
Busan sales team
TEL : +82-51-310-6855~9 FAX : +82-51-515-0406 Overseas Branches
Deagu sales team USA New Jersey Branch TEL : +1-201-816-2985
TEL : +82-53-603-7740~5 FAX : +82-53-603-7788 China Beijing Branch TEL : +86-10-6462-3256
Gwangju sales team Shanghai Branch TEL : +86-21-5308-3582
TEL : +82-62-510-1885~91 FAX : +82-62-526-3262 Japan Tokyo Branch TEL : +81-3-3582-9128
Deajeon sales team Indonesia Jakarta Branch TEL : +62-21-897-4311
TEL : +82-42-480-8919-20 FAX : +82-42-489-8672 Vietnam Hanoi Branch TEL : +84-4-882-0222

LG constantly endeavors to improve our products so that information in this manual is subjected to change without
notice.

Você também pode gostar